SL 500

SL 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully be-
on the purchase of your new fore putting it aside. Then return it to
Mercedes-Benz. your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company 앫 Please follow the recommendations
name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to contained in this manual. They are de-
own an automobile that will be as easy as signed to acquaint you with the opera-
possible to operate and provide years of tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
service.
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- and cautions contained in this manual.
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- They are designed to help improve the
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
and also the safety of you and your passen- cupants.
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- We extend our best wishes for many miles
ment of time: of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
 Contents

Center console ..................................... 23 Turning off engine with

Introduction .......................................... 7 Upper part ...................................... 23 KEYLESS-GO* ................................ 49
Product information................................ 7 Lower part ...................................... 24 Emergency engine shut-down......... 50
Operator’s Manual .................................. 8 Overhead control panel ........................ 25
Service and warranty information ..... 8 Door control panel................................ 26
Important notice for California Safety and Security ........................... 51
retail buyers and lessees of Occupant safety ................................... 52
Mercedes-Benz automobiles ............. 9 Getting started ................................... 27 Airbags ........................................... 53
Maintenance .................................. 10 Unlocking ............................................. 28 Seat belts ....................................... 58
Roadside Assistance ...................... 10 Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 28 Roll bar ........................................... 61
Change of address or ownership.... 10 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 30 Children in the vehicle .................... 62
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Adjusting .............................................. 32 Panic alarm .......................................... 67
or Canada ...................................... 11 Seats............................................... 32 Activating........................................ 67
Where to find it.................................... 12 Steering wheel ................................ 34 Deactivating.................................... 67
Symbols............................................... 13 Mirrors ............................................ 35 Driving safety systems ......................... 68
Operating safety .................................. 14 Driving .................................................. 37 ABS................................................. 68
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 14 Fastening the seat belts.................. 37 BAS................................................. 69
Problems with your vehicle.................. 15 Starting the engine ......................... 39 ESP ................................................. 70
Reporting safety defects...................... 16 Switching on headlamps ................. 43 SBC brake system .......................... 72
Reporting safety defects ................ 16 Turn signals and high beam ............ 43 Anti-theft systems ................................ 75
Windshield wipers........................... 44 Immobilizer ..................................... 75
Problems while driving.................... 45 Anti-theft alarm system .................. 75
At a glance ......................................... 17 Parking and locking .............................. 47 Tow-away alarm .............................. 77
Cockpit ................................................ 18 Parking brake.................................. 47
Instrument cluster ............................... 20 Switching off headlamps................. 48
Multifunction steering wheel ............... 22 Turning off engine with the key....... 48
Contents

Hazard warning flasher ................ 105 Accelerator position..................... 142

Controls in detail ............................... 79 Interior lighting............................. 106 Steering wheel gearshift control
Locking and unlocking ......................... 80 Courtesy lighting .......................... 107 (Speedshift) and manual shift program
Keys ............................................... 80 Instrument cluster ............................. 108 SL 55 AMG................................... 142
KEYLESS-GO card*......................... 84 Instrument cluster illumination .... 108 Emergency operation (Limp Home
Opening the doors from the inside . 89 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 108 Mode) .......................................... 144
Opening the trunk from the inside.. 89 Trip odometer .............................. 109 Good visibility .................................... 145
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 90 Tachometer .................................. 109 Rear view mirror .......................... 145
Closing the trunk lid ....................... 91 Outside temperature indicator ..... 109 Headlamp cleaning system .......... 146
Automatic central locking .............. 91 Control system .................................. 110 Rear window defroster................. 146
Locking and unlocking Multifunction display.................... 110 Sun visors .................................... 146
from the inside ............................... 92 Multifunction steering wheel........ 111 Automatic climate control ................. 147
Seats.................................................... 93 Menus .......................................... 113 Setting the temperature............... 149
Lumbar support.............................. 93 Standard display menu ................ 115 Adjusting air volume .................... 150
Multicontour backrest* .................. 93 AUDIO menu ................................ 115 Adjusting air distribution.............. 151
Moving the seats forward and NAVI menu ................................... 117 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ....... 151
backward........................................ 95 Distronic* menu........................... 117 Defrosting .................................... 151
Seat ventilation* ............................ 96 Malfunction memory menu .......... 118 Air recirculation mode.................. 152
Seat heater..................................... 97 Settings menu .............................. 119 Rear window defroster................. 153
Memory function.................................. 99 Trip computer menu..................... 131 Residual heat and ventilation ....... 154
Storing positions into memory ..... 100 TEL menu* ................................... 133 Deactivating the automatic climate
Recalling positions from memory . 100 Automatic transmission..................... 137 control system ............................. 154
Storing parking position ............... 100 One-touch gearshifting................. 138 Air conditioning............................ 155
Lighting.............................................. 102 Gear ranges.................................. 139 Ventilated storage compartments 156
Exterior lamp switch..................... 102 Gear selector lever position ......... 140 Power windows.................................. 157
Combination switch...................... 104 Program mode selector switch..... 141 Opening and closing the windows 157
 Contents

Retractable hardtop........................... 159 Pedals ........................................... 215 Engine compartment .......................... 227
Opening and closing the retractable Power assistance .......................... 216 Hood............................................. 227
hardtop ........................................ 159 Brakes........................................... 216 Engine oil ...................................... 228
Driving systems ................................. 168 Driving off ..................................... 218 Transmission fluid level ................ 230
Cruise control .............................. 168 Parking.......................................... 218 Oil level in the ABC system ........... 230
Distronic* .................................... 171 Tires.............................................. 219 Coolant ......................................... 230
Active Body Control (ABC) ........... 183 Hydroplaning................................. 219 Battery.......................................... 232
Parktronic system* ...................... 186 Tire traction .................................. 220 Windshield washer system and
Useful features .................................. 190 Tire speed rating ........................... 220 headlamp cleaning system ........... 233
Interior storage spaces ................ 190 Winter driving instructions ............ 221 Tires and wheels ................................ 234
Ashtray......................................... 196 Standing water.............................. 222 Important guidelines..................... 234
Cigarette lighter ........................... 197 Passenger compartment............... 222 Life of tires ................................... 235
Heated steering wheel* (Canada Driving abroad .............................. 222 Direction of rotation ..................... 235
only–model SL 500) ..................... 197 Control and operation of radio trans- Checking tire inflation pressure.... 235
Easy-Pack load assist in the trunk 198 mitters .......................................... 222 Rotating wheels ............................ 238
Electrical outlet ............................ 199 Catalytic converter........................ 223 Winter driving ..................................... 239
Telephone* .................................. 199 Emission control ........................... 224 Winter tires ................................... 239
Tele Aid ........................................ 200 Coolant temperature..................... 224 Block heater (Canada only)........... 240
Garage door opener ..................... 208 At the gas station ............................... 225 Snow chains ................................. 240
Check regularly and before a Maintenance ...................................... 241
long trip ........................................ 226 Clearing the service indicator ....... 241
Operation ......................................... 213 Service term exceeded ................. 241
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 214 Calling up the service indicator .... 242
Driving instructions............................ 215 Resetting the service indicator ..... 242
Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 215 Vehicle care ....................................... 243
Drinking and driving ..................... 215 Cleaning and care of the vehicle... 243
Contents

Batteries ............................................ 319 Spare wheel ................................. 338

Practical hints.................................. 249 Disconnecting the batteries ......... 320 Electrical system ............................... 339
What to do if … .................................. 250 Removing the batteries ................ 321 Main dimensions ............................... 340
Lamps in instrument cluster......... 250 Charging and reinstalling Weights ............................................. 341
Messages in the display ............... 257 batteries....................................... 321 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 342
Where will I find ...?............................ 288 Reconnecting the batteries .......... 321 Capacities .................................... 342
First aid kit ................................... 288 Jump starting ..................................... 323 Engine oils ................................... 343
Vehicle tool kit ............................. 288 Towing the vehicle ............................. 325 Engine oil additives ...................... 343
Locking/unlocking in an emergency.. 290 Installing towing eye bolt ............. 327 Air conditioner refrigerant............ 343
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 290 Fuses ................................................. 329 Brake fluid.................................... 343
Locking the vehicle ...................... 292 Main fuse box............................... 329 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 344
Lowering the Easy Pack feature Fuel requirements........................ 344
manually....................................... 292 Gasoline additives........................ 344
Changing batteries ....................... 293 Technical data ................................. 331 Coolants ...................................... 345
Replacing bulbs ................................. 295 Spare parts service............................ 332 Windshield and headlamp washer
Bulbs ............................................ 295 Warranty coverage............................. 333 system ......................................... 347
Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 298 Loss of Service and Warranty Consumer information....................... 348
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 299 Information Booklet ..................... 333 Uniform tire quality grading ......... 348
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 301 Identification labels ........................... 334
Removing ..................................... 301 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 335
Installing....................................... 301 SL 500 ......................................... 335 Technical terms............................... 351
Flat tire .............................................. 302 SL 55 AMG................................... 335
Preparing the vehicle.................... 302 Engine................................................ 336
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 1 ..... 302 Rims and tires.................................... 337 Index................................................. 357
Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 2 ..... 308 Same size tires............................. 337
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 312 Mixed size tires ............................ 338
 Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap-
held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz orig-
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
inal parts as well as conversion parts and
zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also
accessories explicitly approved by us for
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications,
your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed.
their reliability, safety and their special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

7
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations, and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. New Car Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this 앫
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty,
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only),
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be
dures. kept with the vehicle.

8
 Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Important notice for California (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
retail buyers and lessees of function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
Mercedes-Benz automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:

9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number: tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Service Booklet with you
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
The service advisor will record each ser-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus- vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
vice in the booklet for you.
tomer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
gram brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

10
 Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail- We continuously strive to improve our
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro- product, and ask for your understanding
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult that we reserve the right to make changes
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
eign countries, please be aware that: write to: mation, illustrations and descriptions in
Service facilities or replacement parts this Operator’s Manual might differ from
앫 In the USA:
may not be readily available, your vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- Optional equipment is also described in
앫 European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; this manual, including operating instruc-
One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the tions wherever necessary. Since they are
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts, special-order items, the descriptions and
In Canada: illustrations herein may vary slightly from
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low- the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department If there are any equipment details that are
cause engine damage.
849 Eglinton Avenue East not shown or described in this Operator’s
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5 Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
let are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.

11
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
find information quickly each section has about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
its own reference color: hicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
driver’s seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- 앫 the Service Booklet
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features in your vehicle.

12
 Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified Warning notices draw your attention to haz- 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term defini-
tions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.

13
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in-
terconnected, any modification made may 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- manual
tems. 앫 traffic rules and regulations
Electronic system malfunctions could seri-
앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
ously impair the operating safety of your ve-
dards
hicle.
Ensure that any repairs or modifications to
electronic components are carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.

14
 Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5

15
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.

16
 At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel

17
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit

18
 At a glance
Cockpit

Item Page Item Page

1 Parking brake pedal 41 11 Lever for voice control
2 Hood lock release 227 system, see separate
operating instructions
3 Parking brake release 47
12 Front Parktronic* warn- 186
4 Door control panel 26 ing indicator
5 Exterior lamp switch 43, 13 Digital clock 122
102
14 Overhead control panel 25
6 Headlamp washer switch 146
15 Interior storage compart- 194
7 Combination switch ments (locking/unlock-
앫 Turn signals 43 ing)
앫 Windshield wipers 44 16 7 indicator lamp 64
앫 High beam 104 17 Glove box 190
8 Cruise control switch 18 Center console 23, 24

앫 Cruise control 168 19 Starter switch 31

20 Horn
앫 Distronic* 171
21 Steering wheel adjust- 34
9 Instrument cluster 20,
ment stalk
108
Heated steering wheel* 197
10 Multifunction steering 22,
wheel 111

19
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster

20
 At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Coolant temperature 3 Left multifunction display 1 Supplemental 252
gauge with: with: restraint system
D Coolant temperature 254 Trip odometer 109 (SRS) indicator lamp
warning lamp Main odometer < Seat belt nonusage 256
2 Speedometer with: warning lamp
Stored speed for 117
; Brake warning lamp, 253 Distronic* 6 Right multifunction
except Canada display with:
4 Reset knob
3 Brake warning lamp, Selector lever 39
5 Tachometer with: 109 position
Canada only
A High beam headlamp 104 Outside temperature 109
v Antilock Brake Sys- 250 indicator
tem (ABS)/Electronic display
Stability Program ? Engine malfunction in- 256 Program mode 141
(ESP) warning lamp dicator lamp
7 Fuel gauge with:
E Distronic (DTR)* indi- 251 C Roll bar warning lamp 255
A Fuel reserve warning 255
cator lamp (white) or - Antilock Brake Sys- 251 lamp
warning lamp (red)1 tem (ABS) malfunc-
L Turn signal indicator tion indicator lamp
K lamps
1
Vehicles without Distronic*: Indicator lamp with-
out function. It illuminates with the key in starter
switch position 2. It should go out when the engine
is running.

21
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page
1 Left multifunction display in 110 5 Menu systems: Press button
speedometer è for next system
2 Right multifunction display in 110 ÿ for previous system
tachometer
6 Moving within a menu:
Operating control system 111 Press button
3 Selecting the submenu or j for next display
setting the volume
k for previous display
ç down / to decrease
æ up / to increase
4 Telephone*: press button
í to take a call
ì to end a call

22
 At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page
1 Central locking switch 92
2 Hazard warning flasher 105
on/off switch
3 Central unlocking switch 92
4 Center and side air vent 147
adjustment
5 COMAND system, see 113
separate operating in-
structions
6 Automatic climate control 149
7 Right cup holder 190
8 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 30
button
9 Ashtray 196
Cigarette lighter 197
10 Left cup holder 190

23
At a glance
Center console

Lower part Item Page Item Page

1 Parking assist (Parktronic 186 6 Vehicle level control switch 184
system)* deactivation 7 ESP control switch 71
switch
8 Thumbwheel for setting 179
2 Active Body Control (ABC) 183 distance for Distronic*
switch
9 Distance warning func- 179
3 Tow-away alarm switch 77 tion* on/off switch
4 Hardtop open/close con- 159 10 Program mode selector for 141
trol with buttons for roll bar 61 automatic transmission
5 Exterior rear view mirror 35 11 Selector lever for 137
adjustment automatic transmission

24
 At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off 106
2 Temperature sensor for 147
automatic climate control
3 Right reading lamp on/off 106
4 Interior lighting control 106
5 Hands-free microphone 199
for Tele Aid (emergency
call system), telephone*
and voice control system*
(see separate operating
instructions)
6 Rear view mirror 35,
145
7 Garage door opener 208
8 Tele Aid (emergency call 200
system) button

25
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Door handle 89
2 Switches for open- 157
ing/closing front and rear
side windows
3 Memory function (for stor- 99
ing seat, mirror and steer-
ing wheel settings)
4 Seat heater 97
Seat ventilation* 96
5 Seat adjustment 32, 93
6 Remote trunk lid release 90
switch
7 Door pocket 192

26
 Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

27
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey 왘 Press unlock button 3 Œ on the key.
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-
The indicator lamps light up for a short
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
time. The locking knobs in the doors
should pay special attention to the infor-
move up.
mation given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic i
functions described here, the “Controls in The SBC brake system is activated.
detail” section will help you with further in-
formation. The corresponding page refer- 왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
ences are at the end of each segment. the starter switch.

Electronic key with remote control i

Opening a door causes the windows on
1 ‹ Lock button
that side of the car to open slightly.
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
They will return to the up position when
3 ΠUnlock button
the door is closed.
4 Â Panic button

28
 Getting started
Unlocking

Starter switch positions !

Warning! G If the key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
time, it can no longer be turned in the
key from the starter switch, take the KEY-
starter switch.
LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children 앫 Remove the key from the starter
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to switch and reinsert.
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of If the key can still not be turned, the
vehicle equipment may cause an accident starter battery may not be sufficiently
and/or serious personal injury. charged.
Starter switch
앫 Check the starter battery and
0 For removing key charge it if necessary (컄 page 319).
1 Power supplies to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 323).
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical More information can be found in the
consumers) and driving position “Controls in detail” section
3 Starting position (컄 page 80).

29
Getting started
Unlocking

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-

Warning! G ton on the selector lever corresponds to
The functions of the KEYLESS-GO card are turning the key to the various starter
nearly identical to those of the key, except When leaving the vehicle, always take the switch positions.
that it cannot be used to open the retract- key and the KEYLESS-GO card with you, and
able hardtop. When using the key and the lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
card at the same time, the key overrules tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
the card. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

왘 Grasp the door handle.

The turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs on the doors move up.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
i Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
The SBC brake system is activated. start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have the status 0 (as with key
i removed).
The KEYLESS-GO card must be outside
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
the vehicle to unlock it.
to P.
Do not depress the brake pedal.

30
 Getting started
Unlocking

Position 1 Ignition (or Position 2)

왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton once. ton twice.
Power supply for some electrical con- Power supply for all electrical consum-
sumers, such as seat adjustment. ers. All the lights in the instrument
cluster light up.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO i
start/stop button twice, the power If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
supply is again switched off. start/stop button once, the power sup-
ply is again switched off.

More information can be found in the

“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 84).
For information on starting the engine us-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see Starting with KEYLESS-GO
(컄 page 40).

31
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
belts provide the best restraint when the
Warning! G wearer is in an upright position and belts are
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and properly positioned on the body. Your seat Children 12 years old and under must never
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- must be adjusted so that you can correctly ride in this vehicle, except in a
tening of seat belts, must be done before fasten your seat belt (컄 page 37). Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
the vehicle is put into motion. Never place hands under the seat or near compatible child seat, which operates with
any moving parts while a seat is being ad- the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
Seats justed. hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
wise they will be struck by the airbag when
Warning! G Warning! G it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Infants and small children must be seated in
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause key from the starter switch, take the KEY-
an appropriate infant or child restraint sys-
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you,
tem, which is properly secured with the ve-
and lock your vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat hicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re- The power seats can also be operated with child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
clined position can be dangerous. You could the appropriate door open. Do not leave
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you children unattended in the vehicle, or with
significantly increased if the child restraints
slide under it, the belt would apply force at access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
the child is not properly secured in the child
rious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat an accident and/or serious personal injury.
restraint.

32
 Getting started
Adjusting

The seat adjustment switch is located in Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion depth
the door.
왘 Press the switch forward or backward 왘 Press the switch forward or back in the
in the direction of arrow 1. direction of arrow 5.

! Head restraint height

When moving the seat, be sure that
nothing is in the auxiliary cup holder
and that there are no items in the foot- Warning! G
well or behind the seats. Otherwise the
For your protection, drive only with properly
seats could be damaged.
positioned head restraints.

Seat height Adjust head restraint to support the back of

1 Seat fore and aft adjustment the head approximately at ear level.
2 Seat height 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
3 Seat cushion tilt rection of arrow 2.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
4 Backrest tilt ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
5 Seat cushion depth Seat cushion tilt
dent.
6 Head restraint height 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
왘 Switch on the ignition by turning the rection of arrow 3 until your upper legs
왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
key in the starter switch to position 2 are lightly supported.
rection of arrow 6.
or pressing the KEYLESS GO*
start/stop button twice. Backrest tilt
왘 Press the switch forward or back in the
direction of arrow 4.

33
Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint tilt Steering wheel The stalk is located on the steering column
(lower left).
왘 Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower 왘 Make sure that the ignition is switched
edge of the head restraint cushion.
Warning! G on.

i Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv- All the lights in the instrument cluster
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- light up.
The memory function (컄 page 99) lets
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
you store the steering wheel adjust-
the vehicle.
ment together with the adjustment for
the seat and the exterior rear view mir- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
rors. key from the starter switch, and take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
More information can be found in the you.
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 93). The steering wheel adjustment feature can
also be operated with the driver’s door
open. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
2 Steering column, height
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Steering column, lengthen or shorten
왘 Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.

34
 Getting started
Adjusting

Steering column, height Mirrors Exterior rear view mirror

왘 Move the stalk up or down in the direc- The buttons are located on the lower part
Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
tion of arrow 2. Make sure that your of the center console.
mirrors before driving so that you have a
legs can move freely and that all the
good view of the road and traffic condi-
displays (including malfunction and in-
tions.
dicator lamps) on the instrument clus-
ter are clearly visible.
Inside rear view mirror
i 왘 Manually adjust the inside rear view
The memory function (컄 page 99) lets mirror.
you store the steering wheel adjust-
ment together with the adjustment for
the seat and the exterior rear view mir-
rors. 1 Driver’s side mirror
2 Passenger side mirror
3 Adjustment button

35
Getting started
Adjusting

! !
Warning! G Electrolyte drops coming into contact If an exterior rear view mirror housing
with the vehicle paint finish can only be is forcibly pushed forward or rearward,
Exercise care when using the passenger
completely removed while in their liq- reposition it by applying firm pressure
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
uid state and by applying plenty of wa- until it snaps into place. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
ter. housing is now properly positioned and
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
you can adjust the mirror normally.
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your 왘 Make sure that the ignition is switched
shoulder before changing lanes. on. More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 145).
All the lights in the instrument cluster
light up.
Warning! G 왘 Press button 1 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass 왘 Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
breaks. left or right according to the setting de-
sired.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with i
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
The memory function (컄 page 99) lets
In case it does, immediately flush the affect-
you store the steering wheel adjust-
ed area with water, and seek medical help if
ment together with the adjustment for
necessary.
the seat and the exterior rear view mir-
rors.

36
 Getting started
Driving
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in ride in this vehicle, except in a
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- Always fasten your seat belt before driving Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
ance for the pedals. off. Always make sure your passengers are compatible child seat, which operates with
During sudden driving or braking maneu- properly restrained, even pregnant women. the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
vers, the objects could get caught between hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
the pedals. You could then no longer brake airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
or accelerate. wise they will be struck by the airbag when
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
accident. You and your passenger should al-
or fatal injury will result.
ways wear seat belts.
Infants and small children must be seated in
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible in-
can be considerably more severe without
fant or child restraint system, which is prop-
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
fully in accordance with the child seat man-
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ufacturer’s instructions.
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
death is lessened if you are wearing your
the child is not properly secured in the child
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex-
restraint.
pected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄 page 52).

37
Getting started
Driving

왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt

Warning! G Warning! G from the seat belt outlet 1.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Read and observe the additional warning no- 왘 Place the belt over your shoulder.
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively tices in the “Safety and Security” section 왘 Push the latch plate 2 into the buckle 3
reclined position can be dangerous. You (컄 page 58). until it clicks.
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
up.
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
Proper use of seat belts:
straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
sition and the belt is properly positioned on 앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening.
the body. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
Warning! G not touch the neck or pass under the
arm).
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- on your hips (over hip joint) and not
strained with a separate seat belt. across the abdomen.
1 Seat belt housing 앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
2 Latch plate right position.
3 Buckle 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
4 Release button person at a time.

38
 Getting started
Driving

앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per- Starting the engine

son and another object at the same
time.
앫 Check your seat belt during travel to
Warning! G
ensure that it is properly positioned.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
앫 Ensure that the seat belt is always fit- your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
ted snugly. You should avoid wearing monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
bulky clothing, such as winter coats, sciousness and lead to death.
when traveling in the vehicle. Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
Warning! G ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, P Park position with selector lever lock
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They have the cause determined and corrected R Reverse gear
could tear. immediately. If you must drive under these N Neutral
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the conditions, drive with at least one window D Drive position
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. fully open. More information can be found in the
This could damage the belt. “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 137).
Never attempt to make modifications to 왘 Make sure that the gear selector lever
seat belts. This could impair the effective- is set to P.
ness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

39
Getting started
Driving

Starting with the SmartKey Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. Do not depress ac-
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to You can start your vehicle without a key
celerator.
position 3 and hold until the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
starts (컄 page 29). on the gear selector lever. The selector lever lock is released.

i 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button 1 once.
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the key to position 3 and The engine starts automatically.
release it again immediately. The en- For information on turning off the engine
gine then starts automatically. with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off engine
with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 49).
왘 Depress the brake pedal.
The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the key, see “Turning off engine with
the key” (컄 page 48).

40
 Getting started
Driving

Starting difficulties 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

If the engine does not start as described,
Center. Warning! G
carry out the following steps: When leaving the vehicle always remove the
Parking brake
왘 If you are starting the engine with the key from the starter switch, take the KEY-
key: Turn key in starter to position 0 LESS-GO card (if so equipped) with you and
and repeat starting procedure. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 If you are starting the engine with
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
parking brake, which could result in an acci-
may be open to allow for better detec-
dent and/or serious injury.
tion of the card.
Or:
Start the engine with the key as radio 왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on
signals from another source may be in- handle 2.
terfering with the KEYLESS-GO card. 1 Parking brake The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
2 Release handle 3 (Canada only) in the
왘 Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 39). Remember that extended speedometer goes out.
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 323).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal-
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.

41
Getting started
Driving

Driving After a cold start, the transmission engag- !

es at a higher revolution. This allows the Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
왘 Place the gear selector lever in
catalytic converter to reach its operating ator pedal and applying the brake re-
position D or R.
temperature earlier. duces engine performance and causes
왘 Release the brake pedal.
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
i
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal. Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat- motion.
Warning! G
ic central locking system engages and the
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
locking knobs drop down.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
i Warning! G result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
You can open a locked door from the cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out vent this type of loss of control.
inside. Open door only when conditions of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
are safe to do so. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
! quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
If you hear a warning signal when driv- control of the vehicle and hit someone or
ing off, you have forgotten to release something. Only shift into gear when the en-
the parking brake. gine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Release the parking brake.

42
 Getting started
Driving

Switching on headlamps Turn signals and high beam High beam

왘 Push the combination switch forward.
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column. The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer lights up.

Exterior lamp switch

1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on Combination switch
왘 Turn the switch to B . 1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 102). 왘 Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.

i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal blinks three times.

43
Getting started
Driving

Windshield wipers Switching on windshield wipers !

왘 Turn the combination switch to the de- Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
The combination switch is on the left of the mittent setting when vehicle is taken to
sired position depending on the inten-
steering column. an automatic car wash or during wind-
sity of the rain.
shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
0 Windshield wipers off
the presence of water sprayed on the
I Intermittent wiping (interval depen- windshield, and wipers may be dam-
dent on wetness of windshield) aged as a result.
II Normal wiper speed The switch should not be left in inter-
III Fast wiper speed (Canada only: mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
goes to setting II when the car is the windshield once every time the en-
standing still) gine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
Combination switch i glass when wiping occurs on a dry
The intermittent wiping interval is de- windshield.
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers pendent on wetness of windshield.
Wiping will not occur with a door open. Single wipe
왘 Make sure that the ignition is switched
on. 왘 Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.

44
 Getting started
Driving

Wiping with windshield washer fluid ! Problems while driving

왘 Push switch in the direction of arrow 1 If leaves, snow, etc. block the wind-
past the resistance point. shield wipers, the wiper motor turns The engine runs erratically and misfires
off.
The windshield wiper operates with 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged.
washer fluid. 앫 For safety reasons, withdraw key
from starter switch. Remove block- 앫 The engine electronics may not be op-
Information on filling up the washer reser- erating properly.
age.
voir can be found in the "Operation" sec-
Turn the windshield wipers on 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
tion (컄 page 233). 앫
again. the catalytic converter and damaged it.

If windshield wipers fail to function at 왘 Give very little gas.

all in switch position I, 왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
앫 set the combination switch to the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
next highest wiper speed. soon as possible.

앫 have the windshield wipers The coolant temperature gauge is over

checked at the nearest authorized 248°F (120°C)
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄 page 230).

45
Getting started
Driving

In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫 major assemblies
앫 fuel system
앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.

46
 Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake
You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G
your vehicle. End your drive as follows:
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the key from the starter switch. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 1 Parking brake
Warning! G 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 2 Release handle
앫 Move the selector lever to position P. 왘 Step firmly on the parking brake 1.
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the steering system. In 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. When the engine is running, the indica-
this case, it is important to keep in mind that 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front tor lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Can-
a considerably higher degree of effort is nec- wheel against road curb. ada only) in the speedometer dial will
essary to steer the vehicle. 앫 Turn the key to starter switch position 0 be illuminated
and remove, or press start/stop button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫 Take the key and the KEYLESS-GO*
card (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) and
lock vehicle when leaving.

47
Getting started
Parking and locking

Switching off headlamps

Warning! G Warning! G
왘 Turn the switch to M (컄 page 43).
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
More information can be found in the
key from the starter switch, take the KEY- lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 102).
LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you gerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
Turning off engine with the key
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
an unlocked vehicle. Children could release objects.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in P.
the parking brake and/or move the gear se- Always set the parking brake in addition to
lector lever from position P, either of which shifting to position P (컄 page 140). i
could result in an accident and/or serious Always set the parking brake in addi-
injury. When parked on an incline, also turn front
wheel against road curb. tion to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.

왘 Turn the key in the starter switch

(컄 page 29) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
왘 Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 37).

48
 Getting started
Parking and locking

! 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press the lock !

If you hear a warning signal you have ei- button ‹ on the remote control If you hear a warning signal you have ei-
ther (컄 page 28). ther
앫 forgotten to turn off the lights, or The locking knobs on the doors move 앫 forgotten to turn off the lights, or
down.
앫 not put the gear selector lever in P 앫 not put the gear selector lever in P
before opening the driver’s door. More information can be found in the before opening the driver’s door.
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 80).
Turn off the lights or place the gear se- Turn off the lights or place the gear se-
lector lever in P. Turning off engine with KEYLESS-GO* lector lever in P.

왘 Place the gear selector lever in P.

Warning! G 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always ton until the engine shuts off. To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door With the driver's door closed, the start- keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- er switch is now in the position 1. With openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are the driver's door opened, the starter cially careful when small children are
around. switch is set to position 0, same as key around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there removed from starter switch Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught (컄 page 29). is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing. 왘 Press the seat belt release button in a door during closing.
(컄 page 37).

49
Getting started
Parking and locking

Emergency engine shut-down

If the engine cannot be turned off as de-

scribed, you may use the following backup
procedure.
왘 Open the main fuse box (컄 page 329).
왘 Pull out the two fuses labeled “ENGINE
EMERGENCY STOP” (컄 page 329).

1 Lock button on the door handle Warning! G

왘 After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button 1 on the door handle. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
The locking knobs on the doors move KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
down. you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave chil-
More information can be found in the dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 80). cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an ac-
cident and/or serious personal injury.

50
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

51
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The1 warning lamp in the instrument
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster lights up for about 4 seconds when Warning! G
of the vehicle. you turn the key in the starter switch to po-
sition 1 or 2, or press the KEYLESS-GO* (if In the event that the SRS malfunction indica-
The restraint systems are tor lamp lights up during driving or does not
so equipped) start/stop button once or
앫 Seat belts twice. It goes out when you start the en- come on at all, the SRS may not be opera-
gine. This shows that the restraint systems tional. For your safety, we strongly recom-
앫 Emergency tensioning device
are operational. mend that you visit an authorized
앫 Airbags Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
If the lamp does not come on at all or if it the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
앫 Child seats fails to extinguish after approximately 4 not be activated when needed in an acci-
앫 Child seat recognition seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a mal- dent, which could result in serious or fatal
function in the system has been detected. injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
As independent systems their protective
effects work in conjunction with each oth- More information can be found in the unnecessarily which could also result in inju-
er. "Practical hints" section (컄 page 252). ry.
Improper work on the restraint systems can
i lead to unintentional deployment or opera-
For information on infants and children tional failure.
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
In addition, through improper work there is
straint systems for infants and chil-
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
causing unintended airbag deployment.
(컄 page 62).
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

52
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Airbags
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
Warning! G 앫
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast-
airbags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the airbag cover on
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential driver and passenger to always be in a prop- the steering wheel must be at least ten
for injury resulting from certain frontal im- erly seated position and to wear your seat inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
pacts (front airbags, driver-side kneebag) or belts. able to accomplish this by a combina-
side impacts (head-thorax airbags) which For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
may cause significant injuries. However, no steering wheel. If you have any prob-
collision always be in normal seated position
system available today can totally eliminate lems, please see your authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Center.
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body (컄 page 37). 앫 Do not lean with your head or chest
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas-
close to the steering wheel or dash-
es a small amount of dust from the airbags. Since the airbag inflates with considerable board.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to speed and force, a proper seating and hands
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
on steering wheel position will help to keep wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo- you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc- side the rim can increase the risk and
rary breathing difficulty for people with asth- cupants who are unbelted, out of position or potential severity of hand/arm injury
ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, too close to the airbag can be seriously in- when driver front airbag inflates.
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as jured by an airbag as it inflates with great 앫 Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos-
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any force in the blink of an eye: sible rearward from the dashboard when
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
앫 Sit properly belted in an upright position the seat is occupied.
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
with your back against the seat back-
fresh air by opening a window or door.
rest.

53
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Occupants, especially children, should (2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
앫
never lean their heads in the area of the
Warning! G belts and use an appropriately sized in-
door where the head-thorax airbag in- fant or child restraint system for all chil-
Should you choose to place a child 12 years
flates. This could result in serious inju- dren 12 years old or under.
ries or death should the airbag be old or under in the passenger seat of your
triggered. Always sit upright, properly vehicle, you must properly use a (3) Always wear seat belts properly.
use the seat belts and appropriate size BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn If you believe that, even with the use of
infant or child restraint system. off the passenger side front airbag these guidelines, it would be safer for your
앫 Children 12 years old and under must (컄 page 62). BabySmartTM will not, howev- passenger seat occupants to have the pas-
never ride in this vehicle, except in a er, turn off any side impact airbag. senger side head-thorax airbag deactivated,
Mercedes-Benz authorized It should be noted, however, that there is a then deactivation can be accomplished
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, possibility for a head-thorax airbag related upon your written election to do so at your
which operates with the BabySmartTM injury if occupants, especially children, are authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an ad-
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
not properly seated or restrained when next ditional cost. Please contact your local au-
vate the passenger side front airbag
to a head-thorax airbag which needs to de- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our
when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it ploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its Customer Assistance Center at
inflates in a crash. If this happens, seri- job. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
ous or fatal injury will result. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please for details.
Failure to follow these instructions can re- follow these guidelines:
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu- (1) Occupants, especially children, should
pants. never place their bodies or lean their
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible heads in the area of the door where the
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be head-thorax airbag inflates. This could
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manu- result in serious injuries or death should
al. the head-thorax airbag be activated.

54
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i We caution you not to rely on the pres- Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Airbags are designed to activate only in ence of the airbags in order to avoid emergency tensioning device and
certain frontal impacts (front air bags, wearing your seat belt. airbag
driver-side kneebag), side impacts Your vehicle was originally equipped
(head-thorax airbags) which exceed with airbags which are designed to ac- Warning! G
preset thresholds. Only during these tivate in certain impacts exceeding a
types of impacts, if of sufficient severi- preset threshold to reduce the poten- 앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
ty to meet the deployment threshold, tial and severity of injury. It is important highly stressed in an accident must be
will they provide their supplemental replaced and their anchoring points
to your safety and that of your passen-
protection. must also be checked. Only use belts in-
ger that you replace deployed airbags
stalled or supplied by an authorized
The driver and passengers should al- and repair any malfunctioning airbags Mercedes-Benz Center.
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it to ensure that the vehicle will continue
앫 Airbags and ETDs (Emergency Tension-
is not possible for the airbags to pro- to provide supplemental crash protec-
ing Devices) are designed to function on
vide their intended supplemental pro- tion for occupants.
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD
tection. that was activated must be replaced.
In cases of other frontal impacts, an-
gled impacts, roll-overs, other side im-
pacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents and impacts below air bag
deployment thresholds, the airbags will
not be activated. The driver and pas-
senger will then be protected to the ex-
tent possible by a properly fastened
seat belt.

55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When you sell your vehicle, we strongly

앫 No modifications of any kind may be 앫 In addition, through improper work
made to any components or wiring of there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop- urge you to give notice to the subsequent
the SRS. This includes changing or re- erative or causing unintended airbag de- owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
moving any component or part of the ployment. Work on the SRS must alerting them to the applicable section in
SRS, the installation of additional trim therefore only be performed by an au- the Operator’s Manual.
material, badges, etc., over the steering thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cov-
er, or door trim panels, and installation
앫 For your protection and the protection Warning! G
of others, when scrapping the airbag
of additional electrical/electronic unit or emergency tensioning device,
equipment on or near SRS components In the event that the SRS malfunction indica-
our safety instructions must be fol- tor lamp lights up while driving, the SRS may
and wiring. Keep area between airbags lowed. These instructions are available
and occupants free from objects (e.g. not be operational. For your safety, we
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). strongly recommend that you visit an autho-
Center.
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges. rized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
앫 Given the considerable deployment have the system checked; otherwise the
They could tear. speed and the textile structure of the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
앫 Do not make any modification that could airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
an accident, which could result in serious or
change the effectiveness of the belts. sions or other injuries resulting from air-
bag deployment. fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
앫 An airbag system component within the and unnecessarily which could also result in
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
injury.
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫 Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.

56
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When an airbag deploys, a small amount of The passenger airbag will only be deployed !
dust is released while inflating. This dust is if: Do not place objects heavier than 20
neither injurious to your health, nor does it lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
앫 the passenger seat is occupied
indicate a fire in the vehicle. This could cause the front or side im-
앫 the 7 indicator lamp on the glove
The textile texture of the airbags can cause pact airbag on the front passenger side
box is not lit (컄 page 64)
light skin abrasions due to the speed of in- to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
flation. system's deployment threshold.

Front airbags Kneebag

Driver and passenger airbags are de- The kneebag is located on the driver-side
ployed: lower instrument panel. It is designed to
앫 in the event of a frontal impact operate together with the driver airbag in
certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold. The kneebag operates best in
threshold conjunction with a properly positioned and
앫 independently of the head-thorax air- fastened seat belt.
bags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. You will then be protect- 1 Driver airbag
ed by the fastened seat belts. 2 Passenger airbag
3 Kneebag

57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Head-thorax airbags Seat belts

The head-thorax airbags are deployed:
Warning! G
The use of seat belts and infant and child
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle restraint systems is required by law in all Always fasten your seat belt before driving
50 states, the District of Columbia, the off. Always make sure your passengers are
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
U.S. territories, and all Canadian provinc- properly restrained, even pregnant women.
ment threshold
es. Even where this is not the case, all ve- Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
앫 independently of the front airbags hicle occupants should have their seat sition your seat belt greatly increases your
The head-thorax airbags are not deployed belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
in impacts which do not exceed the sys- motion. accident. You and your passenger should al-
tem’s deployment threshold. Information on fastening seat belts is ways wear seat belts.
The passenger head-thorax airbag will only found in the “Getting started” section If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
deploy if the system senses that the pas- (컄 page 37). can be considerably more severe without
senger seat is occupied. your seat belt properly buckled. Without
i your seat belt buckled, you are much more
For information on infants and children likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
traveling with you in the vehicle and re- ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
straint systems for infants and chil- or killed.
dren, see Children in the vehicle
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
(컄 page 62).
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts (컄 page 53).

1 Head-thorax airbag

58
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Never let more people ride in the vehicle USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively than there are seat belts available. Be sure 앫 Seat belts can only work when used
reclined position can be dangerous. You everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- properly. Never wear seat belts in any
could slide under the seat belt in a collision. strained with a separate seat belt. other way than as described in this sec-
If you slide under it, the belt would apply tion, as that could result in serious inju-
force at the abdomen or neck. This could ries in case of an accident.
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat Warning! G 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best re- belt at all times, because seat belts help
straint when the wearer is in an upright po- Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly reduce the likelihood of and potential
sition and the belt is properly positioned on stressed in an accident must be replaced severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
the body. and their anchoring points must also be ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
checked. system includes SRS (driver airbag, driv-
Keep door storage compartments closed
er-side kneebag, passenger airbag,
while vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so Only use seat belts which have been ap- head-thorax airbags) and ETD (seat belt
may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear proved by Mercedes-Benz. emergency tensioning device). The sys-
and prevent proper positioning of the seat tem is designed to enhance the protec-
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt. tion offered to properly belted
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
occupants in certain frontal (front air-
or to failure.
bags, driver-side kneebag) and side
Have all work carried out only by an autho- (head-thorax airbags) impacts which ex-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. ceed preset deployment thresholds.

59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Emergency tensioning device (ETD),

앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
arm, against your neck or off your shoul- person at a time. Do not fasten a seat seat belt force limiter
der. In a crash, your body would move belt around a person and another per- The seat belts are equipped with emergen-
too far forward. That would increase the son or other objects. cy tensioning devices, belt force limiters,
chance of head and neck injuries. The 앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a and automatic comfort-fit.
belt would also apply too much force to crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
the ribs or abdomen, which could se- The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
verely injure internal organs such as twisted belt against your body could lowing cases when the seat belts are fas-
your liver or spleen. cause injuries. tened:
앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable 앫 Pregnant women should also use a 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
objects in or on your clothing, such as lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion ing a preset severity level
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these should be positioned as low as possible
might cause injuries. 앫 if the restraint systems are operational
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible sure on the abdomen. and functioning correctly, see 1 in-
on your hips and not across the abdo- dicator lamp (컄 page 52).
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
men. If the belt is positioned across your panel or on the seat. Always keep both In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries feet on the floor in front of the seat. es remove slack from the belts in such a
in a crash.
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc-
cupants during a crash.
The automatic comfort-fit feature reduces
the retracting force of the seat belts when
they are in normal use.

60
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Roll bar The roll bar raises automatically in an acci-

Warning! G dent or in a critical driving situation. You
can also raise and lower the roll bar manu-
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that Warning! G ally using the buttons provided.
was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle. The i
device, our safety instructions must be fol- rear storage area is not intended for use by When the roll bar is raised automatical-
lowed. These are available at your autho- occupants and is not equipped for properly ly, you will hear a ratcheting sound.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. seating or restraining occupants. Thus this
area should never be used by any persons. The buttons for the roll bar are on the cen-
Before operating the roll bar switch make ter console under the roof switch.
!
sure that the roll bar’s path is clear and no
Do not place objects heavier than 20
persons are injured by the moving roll bar
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
due to inattention. Raising or lowering of the
This could cause the front or side im-
roll bar could injure someone inadvertently
pact airbag on the front passenger side
occupying the rear storage area.
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold. For your own safety we recommend to drive
with the roll bar raised if the outside temper-
ature is below +5°F (-15°C).

! 1 Lower roll bar

If the outside temperature falls below 2 Raise roll bar
+5°F (-15°C), the roll bar must be
The roll bar can be moved manually when
raised manually using the buttons pro-
the ignition is turned on.
vided to avoid damaging the hydraulics.

61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Lowering the roll bar Children in the vehicle

Warning! G If the rollbar was raised manually:
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
If the roll bar warning light \ in the ta- 왘 Lift the switch for the retractable hard- the vehicle:
chometer remains lit after starting the en- top.
앫 Secure the child using an infant or child
gine, there is a malfunction. In the display
왘 Press and hold button 1 until the roll restraint appropriate to the age and
you see the message Raise the
bar is lowered. size of the child and recommended for
roll-over bar.
If the rollbar was raised automatically: use by Mercedes-Benz.
For safety reasons drive only with the roll
bar upright until the malfunction is repaired. 왘 Press and hold button 2 until you hear 앫 Ensure that the infant or child is prop-
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized the roll bar lock into place. erly secured by a belt at all times while
Mercedes-Benz Center.
the vehicle is in motion.
왘 Press and hold button 1 until the roll
bar is lowered. Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
Raising the roll bar mation on choosing an appropriate re-
i straint system can be obtained from any
왘 Lift the switch for the retractable hard- Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you raised the roll bar manually using
top.
the button, the roll bar will be automat-
왘 Press and hold button 2 until the roll ically lowered and then raised again Infant and child restraint systems
bar is raised. when you open or close the retractable Only use a BabySmartTM compatible child
hardtop. restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.

BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.

62
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

We recommend all infants and children be ! Please read and observe warning labels
properly restrained at all times while the The use of infant or child restraints is affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
vehicle is in motion. required by law in all 50 states, the Dis- or child restraints.
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a spe- trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories,
cial seat belt retractor for the secure fas- and all Canadian provinces.
tening of child restraints. Warning! G
Infants and small children should be
To fasten a child restraint follow child re- seated in an appropriate infant or child Children 12 years old and under must never
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull restraint system properly secured by a ride in this vehicle, except in a
the shoulder belt out completely and let it lap-shoulder belt, and that complies Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
retract. During the seat belt retraction a with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety compatible child seat, which operates with
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate Standard 213 and Canadian Motor the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
that the special seat belt retractor is acti- Vehicle Safety Standard 213. hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down A statement by the child restraint man- airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
on child restraint to take up any slack. ufacturer of compliance with this stan- wise they will be struck by the airbag when
dard can be found on the instruction it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
label on the restraint and in the instruc- or fatal injury will result.
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
tion manual provided with the restraint.
belt can again be used in the usual man- Infants and small children must be seated in
ner. When using any infant or child restraint an appropriate BabySmartTM compatible in-
system, be sure to carefully read and fant or child restraint system, which is prop-
follow all manufacturer’s instructions erly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,
Warning! G for installation and use. fully in accordance with the child seat
Never release the seat belt buckle while the manufacturer’s instructions.
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.

63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

BabySmartTM airbag deactivation

Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
Warning! G system
During an accident, they could be crushed Children too big for child restraint systems
between the occupant and seat belt. should use regular seat belts. Position the
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
significantly increased if the child restraints face or neck. A booster seat may be neces-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and sary to achieve proper belt positioning for
the child is not properly secured in the child children from 41 lbs. until they reach a
restraint. height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper-
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible ly without a booster.
rearward from the dashboard when the seat When the child restraint is not in use, re-
is occupied. move it from the vehicle or secure it with the Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from seats, designed for use with the
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac- Mercedes-Benz system and available at
cident. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, are
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
required for use with the BabySmartTM air-
hicle; even if the children are secured in a
bag deactivation system. With the special
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
child seat properly installed, the passenger
dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
front airbag will not deploy.
hicle equipment and may cause serious
personal injury.

BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.

64
 Safety and Security
Occupant safety

The 7 indicator lamp located on the

glove box will be illuminated, except with Warning! G Warning! G
the key removed or in the starter switch
position 0. The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys- When using a BabySmart compatible child
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat seat on the front passenger seat, the front
i designed to operate with it. It will not work passenger airbag will not deploy only if the
The system does not deactivate the with child seats which are not BabySmartTM 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.
head-thorax airbag and the emergency compatible. Please be sure to check the indicator every
tensioning device. Never place anything between seat cushion time you use the special system child seat.
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces Should the light go out while the restraint is
Self-test BabySmartTM without special the effectiveness of the deactivation sys- installed, please check installation. If the
child seat installed tem. The bottom of the child seat must light remains out, do not use the
make full contact with the passenger seat BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
After turning the key in the starter switch
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat on the passenger seat until the system has
to position 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp
could cause injuries to the child in case of an been repaired.
located on the glove box lights up for ap-
accident, instead of protecting the child.
prox. 6 seconds and then goes out.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
installation of special child seats.
is continuously lit, the system is not func-
tioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.

65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
passenger seat. Signals from such devices
may interfere with the BabySmartTM system.
Such signal interference may cause the
7 indicator lamp not to come on during
self-test or be continuously lit, indicating
that the system is not functioning.

66
 Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking exterior Activating i
lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only: This de-
2 1/2 minutes. 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least one
vice complies with Part 15 of the
second.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Deactivating
(1) This device may not cause harmful
왘 Press button 1 again. interference, and
or (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
왘 Insert key in starter switch.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

67
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) cidents:
앫 excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use
앫 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
firm, steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping
앫 SBC brake system (Sensotronic Brake 앫 wet and slippery road surfaces
the brake pedal defeats the purpose for ABS
Control) 앫 following another vehicle too closely and significantly reduces braking effective-
ABS, BAS, ESP and SBC cannot reduce this ness.
i risk.
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
fectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
vailing road and weather conditions. that the wheels do not lock during braking.
ESP, and SBC is only achieved with win-
This allows you to maintain the ability to
ter tires (M+S tires), or snow chains as
steer your vehicle.
required.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure.
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the speed-
ometer dial flashes. Because of the SBC
brake system, you will not feel any pulsa-
tion in the brake pedal.

68
 Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

The - warning lamp in the speedome- BAS

ter (컄 page 21) lights up when you turn the Warning! G
key to position 1 or 2. It goes out when the The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
engine is running. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of emergency situations. If you apply the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
Flashing warning lamp while braking it increase braking or steering efficiency be- provides full brake boost thereby potential-
yond that afforded by the condition of the ly reducing the braking distance. Apply
The v warning lamp flashes whenever vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af- continuous full braking pressure until the
the ABS is activated. Always adapt your forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, emergency braking situation is over. The
driving style to the prevailing road and including those resulting from excessive ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
weather conditions. speed in turns, following another vehicle too
When you release the brake pedal the
왘 When the ABS is in the regulating closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, atten-
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
mode, continue to apply pressure on tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
is then deactivated.
the brake pedal. dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

69
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

ESP
Warning! G Warning! G
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of monitors the vehicle's traction (force of Never switch off the ESP when you see the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can adhesive friction between the tires and the ABS/ESP-warning lamp v flashing in
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- road surface) and handling. the speedometer dial. In this case proceed
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes as follows:
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
prevent accidents, including those resulting as possible.
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
from excessive speed in turns, following an-
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially tor.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
useful while driving off and on wet or slip- 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
pery road surfaces. the prevailing road conditions.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the Failure to observe these guidelines could
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the speedometer dial flashes when the ESP is cause the vehicle to skid.
safety of others. engaged. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
The warning lamp v in the speedome- from excessive speed.
ter dial (컄 page 21) lights up when you
turn the key to position 1 or 2. It goes out
when you start the engine

70
 Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

! Switching off ESP

Warning! G Because of ESP’s automatic operation,
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
the engine must be shut off when Warning! G
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can 앫 the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer. ESP should not be switched off during nor-
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
mal driving other than in the circumstances
cannot prevent accidents, including those 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the described below. Disabling of the system
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or front axle raised. will reduce vehicle stability in standard driv-
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
Active braking action through the ESP ing maneuvers.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must may otherwise seriously damage the
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- rear axle brake system. To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
ous manner which could jeopardize the us- ESP will only function properly if you the ESP in driving situations where it would
er’s safety or the safety of others. use wheels of the recommended tire be advantageous to have drive wheels spin
size (컄 page 337). and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
such as:
앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
앫 in sand or gravel

i
Distronic* cannot be activated when
ESP has been deactivated.

71
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

The button is located in the lower part of ! SBC brake system

the center console. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched The SBC brake system combines a hydrau-
off. This may cause serious damage to lic brake circuit with electronically con-
the drive train which is not covered by trolled brake servo assistance. You have
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. increased braking safety and improved
braking comfort.

Warning! G Warning! G
When the ESP warning lamp v is Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
illuminated continuously, ESP is switched in the speedometer display, for example by
1 ESP on/off off. the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
왘 Press ESP button 1 until the ESP warn- Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- indicator lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
ing lamp v in the speedometer ing road conditions and to the non-operating section (컄 page 253). Also read and ob-
lights up. status of the ESP. serve the messages in the instrument clus-
ter display (컄 page 257).
ESP is deactivated.
Switching on ESP
If one or more wheels are spinning, the
ESP warning lamp v in the speedome- 왘 Press button 1.
ter flashes, regardless of the speed. The ESP warning lamp v in the
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel speedometer goes out. You are now
even when ESP is deactivated. again in normal driving mode.
ESP always operates when you are brak-
ing, even when it has been deactivated.

72
 Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

A tow bar must be used if circumstances i

Warning! G do not permit the use of the recommended If the SBC brake system is activated as
towing methods and the vehicle requires the brake pedal is first depressed, you
The SBC brake system requires electrical
towing with all four wheels on the ground. may feel a reduced pedal resistance
power to operate.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on and longer pedal travel than normal.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply the ground is only permissible for distances When releasing the pedal, you may also
or electrical system may impair brake sys- up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not feel the brake pedal pulsate and you
tem operation and switch it into its emer- to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more in- may hear a sound which is caused by
gency operation mode. In such a case, the formation, refer to “Towing the vehicle” the activation of the SBC pump. This is
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 253) and (컄 page 325). normal and not an indication of a mal-
the warning messages (컄 page 265) light up function. Pedal travel returns to normal
while driving. To brake, the driver must then when you release the brake pedal and
The SBC brake system is automatically ac-
apply significantly greater brake pedal pres- the sound soon ceases.
tivated when you:
sure and depress the pedal much further to
obtain the expected braking effect. If neces- 앫 unlock the vehicle with the key or the
sary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. KEYLESS-GO* card
Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. 앫 open the driver’s or passenger door
Stopping distance is increased!
앫 turn the key in the starter switch to
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
position 1
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground 앫 in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly start/stop button on selector lever
equipment. once
앫 depress the brake pedal
앫 release the parking brake

73
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

The SBC brake servo assistance switches 앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered
Warning! G off automatically when you roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
Have brake pad replacement and other work 앫 remove the key from the starter switch
produces heat which serves to dry the
on the SBC brake system carried out by (after approximately two minutes)
brake disks and help prevent corro-
qualified technicians only. Contact your 앫 lock the vehicle (after approximately sion.
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- 20 seconds)
tion. The SBC brake system must be deacti- 앫 On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
vated prior to working on the system. High Note on driving with SBC
pressure is intermittently built up in the sys- prevent the brakes from overheating
앫 Following extended periods of only mi- and to reduce brake wear.
tem as part of its automatic self-test. In ad-
nor loads to your brake system, you
dition, the system is automatically activated
should occasionally apply the brakes 앫 After hard braking, it is advisable to
when the vehicle is unlocked by remote con-
when traveling at high speeds. This im- drive on for some time so that the air
trol, when the driver or passenger door is
proves the grip of the brake pads. stream will cool down the brakes fast-
opened, when the key in the starter switch er.
is turned to position 1, when the brake ped-
앫 Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo-
al is depressed or when the parking brake is Warning! G nents (e.g. brake pads) should be in-
released. Failure to deactivate the system
Be very careful not to endanger other road stalled on your vehicle. Brake pads not
prior to maintenance will cause brake pis-
users when you apply the brakes. approved by Mercedes-Benz may im-
tons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which
pair the safety of your vehicle.
may result in injuries (contusions and acid
burns). Extended brake pistons may also
cause injury.

74
 Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system i
If the alarm stays on for more than
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
someone opens
tem (컄 page 202) provided Tele Aid
Activating
앫 a door service was subscribed to and properly
앫 With the key: Removing the key from activated.
앫 the trunk lid
the starter switch activates the immo-
bilizer. 앫 the hood
앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en- 앫 a storage compartment in the rear
gine by means of the start/stop button 앫 the glove box
on the gear selector lever activates the
immobilizer. 앫 the storage space under the armrest
The alarm system will also be triggered
Deactivating when
앫 With the key: Inserting the key in the 앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle
starter switch deactivates the immobi-
앫 unlocking and opening the driver’s
lizer.
door with the mechanical key
앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en-
gine by means of the start/stop button
on the gear selector lever deactivates
the immobilizer.

75
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Arming the alarm system Disarming the alarm system With KEYLESS-GO*
The alarm system is armed after locking The alarm system is disarmed when you 왘 Grasp the outside door handle.
the vehicle with the remote control. The unlock your vehicle with the remote con- or
turn signal lamps blink three times to indi- trol. The turn signal lamps blink once to in-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
cate that the alarm system is activated. dicate that the alarm system is
ton.
The ‹ indicator lamp in the central deactivated.
The alarm is canceled.
locking switch (컄 page 23) will blink after
approximately 10 seconds when the alarm i
system is completely armed. The alarm system will rearm automati-
cally again after aprroximately 40 sec-
i onds if no door was opened.
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times, a door or the hood may not Canceling the alarm
be closed properly.
To cancel the alarm:
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again. With the key
왘 Insert the key in the starter switch.
or
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button.
The alarm is canceled.

76
 Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Tow-away alarm Disarming tow-away alarm i

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be- if the ignition is turned on.
and audible alarm will be triggered when
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
a surface subject to movement, such as a 왘 Press switch 1.
i ferry or auto train.
The indicator lamp 2 in the switch
The tow-away protection alarm is trig- The switch is on the center console be- lights up briefly.
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift- tween the driver’s seat and the passenger
왘 Lock your vehicle with the key or (vehi-
ed on one side. seat.
cles with KEYLESS-GO*) the lock but-
If the alarm stays on for more than ton at each door handle.
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
til you lock your vehicle again.
tem (컄 page 202) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated.

Arming tow-away alarm

When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about 1 Tow-away alarm off switch
30 seconds. 2 Indicator lamp
When you unlock your vehicle, the 왘 Turn off the ignition and remove the
tow-away protection disarms automatical- key.
ly.

77
78
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Retractable hardtop
Driving systems
Useful features

79
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will Keys
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- Your vehicle comes supplied with two
cle. if you are already familiar with the SmartKeys with remote controls and a re-
basic functions of your vehicle, this section movable mechanical key. The locking tabs
will be of particular interest to you. for the mechanical key portion of the two
keys are a different color to help distin-
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
guish each key unit.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual. The remote control key provides an ex-
The corresponding page numbers are giv- tended operating range. To prevent theft,
SmartKey with remote controls
en at the beginning of each segment. however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity to 1 ‹ Lock button
it. 2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
The key centrally locks and unlocks:
4 ΠUnlock button
앫 the doors 5 Battery check lamp
앫 the trunk lid 6 Â Panic button (컄 page 67)

앫 the glove box i

앫 the storage space under the armrest You can also open and close the re-
tractable hardtop using the key
앫 the storage compartment in the rear (컄 page 163).
앫 the fuel filler flap

80
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

! Individual setting Restoring to factory setting

To prevent possible malfunction, avoid If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
exposing the key to high levels of elec- to reprogram the key so that simultaneously for about six seconds
tromagnetic radiation. pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s until the battery check lamp 5 blinks
door, interior lockable storage compart- twice.
Factory setting ments and the fuel filler flap.

Global unlocking
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ Warning! G
simultaneously for about six seconds
왘 Press button Œ. until the battery check lamp 5 blinks When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
twice. key from the starter switch, take the KEY-
All turn signals blink once. The locking
LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
knobs in the doors move up. The key will then function as follows:
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
The vehicle will lock again automatically Unlocking driver’s door unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
within approximately 40 seconds of un- 왘 Press button Œ once. an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for chil-
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened. dren to open a locked door from the inside,
Global unlocking which could result in an accident or serious
Global locking 왘 Press button Œ twice. injury.
왘 Press button ‹. Global locking
All turn signals blink three times. The lock- 왘 Press button ‹.
ing knobs in the doors move down.

81
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

! Checking the batteries Unlocking the trunk lid

If you can no longer lock or unlock the 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. You can unlock the trunk separately.
vehicle with the key, then either the
The battery check lamp 5 lights up 왘 Press and hold button Š until trunk
batteries in the electronics are dis-
briefly to indicate that the key batteries unlocks.
charged or the key is malfunctioning.
are in order.
앫 Check the batteries in the key i
(컄 page 82) and replace them if ! If the vehicle was previously centrally
necessary (컄 page 293). If the battery check lamp 5 does not locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
light up briefly during check then the cally when closed. The turn signals will
or
key batteries are discharged. flash three times to confirm locking.
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock
앫 Change the batteries (컄 page 293).
the doors (컄 page 290) and trunk
(컄 page 291) as required. Lock the You can obtain the required batteries
vehicle using the mechanical key at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
(컄 page 292). ter.
If the key is malfunctioning, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

82
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk lid i

The handle is located in the rear license The vehicle must be unlocked.
plate recess. To facilitate trunk loading and unload-
ing when the hardtop is retracted, you
can raise the hardtop from its storage
position in the trunk using the loading
aid feature (컄 page 198). You may also
unhook the luggage cover.
Remember to resecure the luggage
cover after loading/unloading the 1 Unlocked
trunk. Otherwise you will not be able to 2 Locked
lower the retractable hardtop. 왘 Turn the key completely to the right to
1 Trunk lid lock position 2.
2 Handle The trunk can also be opened from the in-
side in an emergency, see Trunk lid emer- The trunk remains locked even when
왘 Lift the trunk lid. gency release (컄 page 90). the vehicle is centrally unlocked.

i
Separately locking the trunk
You can only cancel the separate trunk
왘 Close the trunk lid (컄 page 91). locking mode by means of the mechan-
왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the ical key.
SmartKey (컄 page 290).
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.

83
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Separately unlocking the trunk KEYLESS-GO card*

왘 Turn the key completely to the left to
Warning! G
Specially equipped vehicles come with two
position 1. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
KEYLESS-GO cards. On these vehicles, the
You can now open the trunk. validity of the KEYLESS-GO card is key from the starter switch, take the KEY-
checked every time you grasp a door LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key handle. and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, If the card is valid, your vehicle unlocks
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
you should do the following:
앫 the doors vehicle equipment may cause an accident
왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an and/or serious personal injury.
앫 the trunk lid
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 the glove box
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the !
mechanical key immediately to your 앫 the storage space under the armrest To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
car insurance company. 앫 the storage compartment in the rear exposing the KEYLESS-GO* card to
왘 If necessary have the mechanical lock high levels of electromagnetic radia-
앫 the fuel filler flap
replaced. tion.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.

84
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO* 앫 In order to start the engine with the 앫 If the KEYLESS-GO card is removed
KEYLESS-GO card from the vehicle while the ignition is
앫 Always carry the KEYLESS-GO card
switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the
with you. 앫 the KEYLESS-GO card must be lo-
vehicle with the card), the message
cated in the vehicle
앫 Never store the KEYLESS-GO card to- Chip card not recognized! will ap-
gether with: 앫 all the doors must be closed pear in the multifunction display.
앫 electronic items such as a cellular 앫 If you have started the engine with the Find the card or change its present lo-
phone or another KEYLESS-GO card KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you cation immediately (e.g. place it on the
can only turn it off again with this but- front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
앫 metallic objects such as coins or
ton, even if you have put the key in the pocket).
metal foil
starter switch in the meantime.
Doing so could impair the function of 앫 Remember that the engine can be
앫 This does not apply if, after starting, the started by anyone with a KEYLESS-GO
the KEYLESS-GO system.
selector lever is still in position P. The card that is left inside the vehicle. If you
앫 Always take a SmartKey with you in key will then have priority over the card leave the card behind when exiting and
case of a malfunction of the KEY- and the vehicle’s electrical system will locking the vehicle, the message Chip
LESS-GO system. operate according to the position of card still in vehicle! will appear in
앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the card the key in the starter switch, even stop- the multifunction display.
must be located outside the vehicle ping the engine.
within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a 앫 If the KEYLESS-GO card is positioned
door or the trunk lid. farther away from the vehicle (e.g. in-
side clothing or briefcase) and can no
longer be recognized by the system,
the vehicle cannot be locked or the en-
gine started via the KEYLESS-GO sys-
tem.

85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Individual setting Unlocking the driver’s door

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Grasp the driver’s handle.
Global unlocking
to reprogram the KEYLESS-GO card so that
Global unlocking
왘 Grasp the door handle. grasping a door handle only unlocks the
driver’s door, interior lockable storage 왘 Grasp the door handle on the pas-
The vehicle will lock again automatically senger side.
compartments and the fuel filler flap.
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened. Global locking
왘 Press lock button at door handle or
i trunk.
The vehicle could inadvertently unlock
if the KEYLESS-GO card is within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the vehicle and
앫 the door handle is splashed with
water, or
앫 you attempt to clean the door
handle. 1 Programming button
2 “Driver’s door” symbol
Global locking 3 “Global unlock” symbol
왘 Press lock button at door handle 왘 Press and hold the programming
(컄 page 50) or trunk (컄 page 88). button 1 until the “Driver’s door”
symbol 2 lights up.
The KEYLESS-GO card will then func-
tion as follows:

86
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Restoring to factory setting Checking the batteries Checking vehicle lock status
왘 Press and hold the programming 왘 Briefly press the programming If you cannot remember whether you have
button 1 until the “Global unlock” button 1. locked the vehicle, you can check the lock
symbol 3 lights up. status using the KEYLESS-GO card.
The KEYLESS-GO card batteries are in
! order if the indicator lamp for either the 왘 Briefly press the programming
“Driver’s door” 2 or “Global unlock” 3 button 1.
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
comes on red or green. The indicator lamp for the “Driver’s
with the KEYLESS-GO card, then either
the batteries of the KEYLESS-GO card ! door” 2 or “Global unlock” 3 lights up
are discharged or the KEYLESS-GO in red or green.
If the symbols 2 or 3 do not light up
card is malfunctioning. during the check, then the batteries of Vehicle lock status:
앫 Check the batteries of the the KEYLESS-GO card are discharged. Red Vehicle is locked
KEYLESS-GO card (컄 page 87) and
왘 Change the batteries Green Vehicle is unlocked
replace them if necessary
(컄 page 294).
(컄 page 294).
You can obtain the batteries at any au-
or
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 Use the key to unlock the doors
(컄 page 81) and trunk (컄 page 82)
as required. Lock the vehicle using
the key (컄 page 81).
If your KEYLESS-GO card is malfunc-
tioning, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Unlocking the trunk lid i Closing the side windows

The handle is located in the rear license If the vehicle was previously centrally 왘 Press and hold lock button at door
plate recess. locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- (컄 page 49) until the side windows are
cally when closed. The turn signals will closed.
flash three times to confirm locking.
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- Warning! G
out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
ly if a KEYLESS-GO card is recognized When closing the windows, be sure that
inside the trunk. there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
Locking the vehicle If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
lows:
왘 Pull on the handle and lift up the trunk 앫 Release the lock button.
lid. 앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The vehicle unlocks the trunk lid only. The side windows will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
is not opened.

1 Trunk lock button

왘 Press the lock button at door
(컄 page 49) or trunk.

88
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Loss of KEYLESS-GO-card Opening the doors from the inside i

If you lose your KEYLESS-GO card, you If you open a door, the side windows on
You can open a locked door from the in-
should do the following: that side of the vehicle will lower slight-
side. Open door only when conditions are
ly. The windows close again when you
왘 Have the KEYLESS-GO card deactivat- safe to do so.
close the door.
ed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Opening the trunk from the inside
왘 Report the loss immediately to your car
insurance company. You can open the trunk from the inside if
왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if the vehicle is stationary and the retract-
necessary. able hardtop is fully opened or closed. The
switch is located on the driver’s door.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘 Pull on the door handle 2.
If door was locked, the locking knob 1
will move up.

1 Remote trunk lid release switch

2 Indicator lamp

89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

왘 Pull remote trunk lid release switch 1. Trunk lid emergency release !
The trunk unlocks. The indicator The emergency release button does
lamp 2 comes on. It remains lit until not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat-
you close the trunk again. tery is discharged or disconnected.

i i
To facilitate trunk loading and unload-
If the emergency release button is
ing when the hardtop is retracted, you
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
can raise the hardtop from its storage
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
position in the trunk using the loading
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
aid feature (컄 page 198). You may also
opens.
unhook the luggage cover. The emergency release button is located
on the left side of the trunk. To cancel the alarm, insert the key in
Remember to resecure the luggage
the starter switch or press button Œ
cover after loading/unloading the Illumination of the emergency release but- or ‹ on the key.
trunk. Otherwise you will not be able to ton:
lower the retractable hardtop.
앫 The button will blink for 30 minutes af-
ter opening the trunk.
앫 The button will blink for 60 minutes af-
ter closing the trunk.
왘 Briefly press the emergency release
button.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.

90
 Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk lid i Automatic central locking

To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
The doors and the trunk lid automatically
not place the key in the trunk.
Warning! G lock when the vehicle is set into motion.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To pre-
You can open a locked door from the in-
To prevent possible personal injury, always vent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
side. Open door only when conditions are
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk trunk lid will open automatically if a
safe to do so.
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be espe- KEYLESS-GO card is recognized inside
cially careful when small children are the trunk. i
around. When the hardtop is retracted, it must The doors unlock automatically after an
be completely lowered in the trunk be- accident if the force of the impact ex-
fore the trunk lid can be closed ceeds a preset threshold.
(컄 page 199).
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
Warning! G approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
out when the vehicle
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi- 앫 is pushed
or. 앫 is on a test stand
1 Handle
왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on You can deactivate the automatic locking
handle 1. using the control system (컄 page 128).

91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking from the inside i

If the vehicle was previously centrally
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from in-
locked using the SmartKey or the
side using the central locking switches.
KEYLESS-GO* card, it will not unlock
This can be useful, for example, if you want
using the central locking switch.
to unlock the passenger door from the in-
side or want to lock the vehicle before
starting to drive.
Warning! G
i
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
You can open a locked door from inside Central locking switches key from the starter switch, take the KEY-
at any time. Open door only when con-
1 Locking LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
ditions are safe to do so.
2 Unlocking and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
If you have locked the vehicle with the unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
key or the KEYLESS-GO* card, the cen- Locking an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
tral locking switches do not work. vehicle equipment may cause an accident
왘 Press central locking switch 1.
and/or serious personal injury.
The switches are located above and be- If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
tween the center air vents of the air condi- locks.
tioning.
Unlocking
왘 Press central locking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.

92
 Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be Lumbar support Multicontour backrest*
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 32). You can adjust the contour of the seat’s You can adjust the backrest contour of the
lumbar support to best support your spine. seat to support your spine.
The thumbwheel is located on the lower The switches are located on the lower side
side of the seat. of the seat.

1 Thumb wheel 1 Lumbar region support

왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. 2 Shoulder region support
3 Backrest side cushions
All the lamps in the instrument cluster 4 Massage function (PULSE)
should light up.
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘 Set the lumbar support between 0
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
and 5.
should light up.

93
Controls in detail
Seats

Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Massage function (PULSE)

왘 Press k or j on rocker 왘 Press æ or ç on switch 2. You can reduce muscle tension during long
switch 1. trips by periodically using the massage
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
function.
This selects the air cushion you wish to
adjust. Backrest side cushions 왘 Press button 4.
왘 Press æ or ç on rocker 왘 Press switch 3 to the right or left. The indicator lamp on button 4 lights
switch 1. up. The air cushions in the lumbar re-
The lateral support increases or de-
gion inflate and deflate rhythmically.
The air cushion inflates or deflates. creases.
i
The massage function switches off au-
tomatically after approximately eight
minutes. The indicator lamp extinguish-
es.

94
 Controls in detail
Seats

Moving the seats forward and ! Moving the seat forward

backward To avoid damage to seats, make sure 왘 Press switch at 1.
that there is nothing in the cup holder
You can move the seats forward and back and that no bags are in the footwells or Moving the seat backward
to facilitate loading and unloading. behind the seats during seat move-
왘 Press switch at 2.
ment.
Warning! G
The switch is located on the top side of the
When moving the seats, be sure that no one seat.
can be caught by them. Never place hands
under seat or near any moving parts during
a seat adjustment procedure. To stop the
seat from moving when potential danger ex-
ists:
앫 press the switch again
앫 move the seat adjustment switch on the
door (컄 page 32)

1 Seat forward
2 Seat backward

95
Controls in detail
Seats

Seat ventilation* All the lamps in the instrument cluster !

light up. If one or all of the lamps blink on the
The switch is located on the door. The blue seat ventilation* switch, there is insuf-
indicator lamps on the switch show the Switching on the seat ventilation ficient voltage since too many electri-
ventilation level selected: cal consumers are switched on. The
왘 Press switch 1.
seat ventilation* switches off automat-
Level 3 Three indicator lamps on Three blue indicator lamps on the
ically.
Level 2 Two indicator lamps on switch light up.
The seat ventilation* will switch back
Level 1 One indicator lamp on Switching off the seat ventilation on again automatically as soon as suffi-
Ventilation off No indicator lamp on cient voltage is available.
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indi-
cator lamps go out.

i
In normal operation the seat ventilation
will switch off automatically after about
30 minutes.

1 Seat ventilation switch

왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.

96
 Controls in detail
Seats

Seat heater Switching on the seat heater Switching off rapid seat heating mode
왘 Press lower switch position 1. 왘 Press upper switch position 2 again.
Vehicles without seat ventilation* A red indicator lamp on the switch !
The switch is located on the door. lights up.
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is in-
Switching off the seat heater
sufficient voltage available since too
왘 Press lower switch position 1 again. many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off auto-
i matically.
The seat heater will be automatically
The seat heater will switch back on
switched off after approximately
again automatically as soon as suffi-
30 minutes.
cient voltage is available.
Rapid seat heating mode
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating 왘 Press upper switch position 2.

왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. Both red indicator lamps on the switch
light up.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up. i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only the right-hand indicator
lamp remains lit.

97
Controls in detail
Seats

Vehicles with seat ventilation* Switching on the seat heater Switching off rapid seat heating mode
The switch is located on the door. The red 왘 Press upper switch position 1 twice. 왘 Press upper switch position 1 twice.
indicator lamps on the switch show the
A red indicator lamp on the switch !
heater level selected:
lights up.
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
Seat heater off No indicator lamp on heater switch are blinking, there is in-
Switching off the seat heater
Level 1 One indicator lamp on sufficient voltage available since too
왘 Press upper switch position 1 again. many electrical consumers are turned
Level 2 Two indicator lamps on on. The seat heater switches off auto-
i matically.
The seat heater will be automatically
The seat heater will switch back on
switched off after approximately
again automatically as soon as suffi-
30 minutes.
cient voltage is available.
Rapid seat heating
왘 Press upper switch position 1 once.
Both indicator lamps on the switch light
up.

1 Seat heater switch i

The system switches over to normal
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. heating mode after approximately five
All the lamps in the instrument cluster minutes. Only the right-hand indicator
light up. lamp remains lit.

98
 Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
! With the memory switch you can store up The memory switch is located on the door.
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- to three different settings per key and KEY-
er should check and adjust the seat LESS-GO* card.
height, seat position fore and aft, and The following settings are saved for each
seat backrest angle if necessary, to en- stored position:
sure adequate control, reach and com-
앫 Driver’s seat and backrest position
fort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. Also see air- 앫 Steering wheel position
bag section (컄 page 53) for proper seat 앫 Inside rear view mirror position
positioning.
앫 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to position M Memory button
ensure adequate control, reach, opera-
tion and comfort. Both the inside and 앫 Passenger side exterior rear view mir- 1, 2, 3 Stored positions
outside rear view mirrors should be ad- ror position 왘 Be sure that the ignition is switched on
justed for adequate rear vision. These key dependent memory settings can or one door is open.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small be deactivated if desired (컄 page 130). All the lamps in the instrument cluster
children should be seated in a properly light up when the ignition is switched
secured restraint system that complies Warning! G on.
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Ve- Do not activate the memory function while
hicle Safety Standard 213. driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.

99
Controls in detail
Memory function

Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory Storing parking position

왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and 왘 On memory switch, press and hold For easier parking you can adjust the pas-
rear view mirrors to the desired posi- stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until senger exterior rear view mirror so that you
tion (컄 page 32). the seat, steering wheel and rear view can see the right rear wheel as soon as you
mirrors have fully moved to the stored engage reverse gear R.
왘 Press memory button M.
positions.
왘 Release memory button and press a i
stored position button 1, 2, or 3 within i The mirror parking position feature
three seconds. Releasing the button immediately (컄 page 131) must be activated and the
All the settings are stored at the select- stops movement to the stored posi- passenger side exterior rear view mirror
ed position. tions. (컄 page 35) must be selected at the
time in order for the system to recall the
stored mirror position when reverse
gear R is engaged.

The exterior rear view mirror returns to its

stored driving position:
앫 10 seconds after you put the gear se-
lector lever in position D
앫 immediately once you exceed a speed
of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
앫 immediately when you press the button
for driver’s side mirror

100
 Controls in detail
Memory function

You can store a parking position for the 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
passenger exterior rear view mirror for with button 2 so that you see the rear
each key and each KEYLESS-GO* card us- wheel and the road curb.
ing the memory switch.
왘 Press memory button M on the door.
왘 Within three seconds press adjustment
button 2 in the center console.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.

i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
1 Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror
2 Adjustment button
왘 Stop the vehicle.
왘 Switch ignition on (if not already on).
왘 Press button 1 in center console.
The passenger side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.

101
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head- Exterior lamp switch i
lamps and use the turn signals, see the If you remove the key and open the
“Getting started” section (컄 page 43). The exterior lamp switch is located on the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then
앫 a warning sounds
앫 $ appears in the speedometer
display field
앫 the message Turn lamps off ap-
pears in the tachometer display
field

M Off i
U Automatic headlamp mode With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
C Parking lamps, license plate lamps low beam headlamps cannot be
and instrument panel lamps switched off manually.
B Low beam or high beam headlamps To activate the daytime running lamp
ˆ Standing lamps, right mode, see “Setting daytime running
lamp mode (USA only)” (컄 page 124).
‚ Standing lamps, left

102
 Controls in detail
Lighting

Manual headlamp mode 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to U. Daytime running lamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking i 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
lamps can be switched on or off with the position M or U.
With the daytime running lamp mode
exterior lamp switch.
activated, the low beam headlamps will When the engine is running, the low
not be switched off automatically. beam headlamps are automatically
Automatic headlamp mode
switched on. In low ambient light con-
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps i ditions the parking lamps will also
and license plate lamps switch on and off switch on.
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
automatically depending on the brightness
not be switched on manually with exte-
of the ambient light. Canada only:
rior lamp switch in position U. To
activate the fog lamps turn exterior When you shift from a driving position to
Warning! G lamp switch to position B. position N or P, the low beam switches off
(3 minutes delay).
In automatic headlamp mode, the head-
i For nighttime driving you should turn the
lamps will not be automatically switched on
If you drive in countries where vehicles exterior lamp switch to position B to
under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to
drive on the other side of the road than permit activation of the high beam head-
you and to others, activate headlamps by
the country where the vehicle is regis- lamps.
turning exterior lamp switch to B.
tered, you must have the headlamps
The driver is responsible for the operation of
modified for symmetrical low beams.
the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automat-
Relevant information can be obtained
ic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driv-
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
er. Switch on the vehicle lights manually
ter.
when driving or when traffic conditions re-
quire you to do so.

103
Controls in detail
Lighting

USA only: Switching on front fog lamps Combination switch

The high beam headlamps can also be ac- 왘 Make sure that the low beam head-
The combination switch is located on the
tivated when driving with the daytime run- lamps are switched on.
left side of the steering column.
ning lamp mode activated and the exterior
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
lamp switch in position M.
stop.
To activate the daytime running lamp The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp lamp switch lights up.
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 124).

i Switching on rear fog lamp

See notes on the exterior lamp switch 왘 Make sure that the low beam head-
(컄 page 102). lamps are switched on.
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
Locator lighting and night security stop. 1 High beam
illumination 2 High beam flasher
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
Locator lighting and night security illumi- lamp switch lights up.
nation are described in the control system Switching on high beams
section, see “Setting locator lighting” 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to B
(컄 page 125) and "Exterior lamps delayed or to U (컄 page 102).
switch-off" (컄 page 125).
왘 Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam symbol in the tachome-
ter will light up.

104
 Controls in detail
Lighting

High beam flasher Hazard warning flasher Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
The hazard warning flasher can be activat-
direction 2. 왘 Press the hazard warning flasher
ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
switch.
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed. All the turn signals will blink.
The switch is located above and between i
the center air vents.
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
vated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the re-
spective left or right turn signals will
operate.

Switching off the hazard warning

flasher
왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch

105
Controls in detail
Lighting

Interior lighting Automatic control i

If the door remains open, the interior
Activating lamps switch off automatically after ap-
왘 Slide switch 4 to the left. proximately five minutes.
Interior lamps are switched on in dark-
ness when you Deactivating

앫 unlock the vehicle 왘 Slide switch 4 to the right.

앫 open a door The interior lighting and the entry/exit

lamps remain switched off in darkness,
앫 remove the key from the starter even when you
switch
1 Left reading lamp 앫 unlock the vehicle
2 Right reading lamp 앫 open the trunk
앫 open a door
3 Interior lighting on/off In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the
4 Slide switch for interior lighting control door trays will come on when you open 앫 remove the key from the starter
a door. switch

The interior lamps are switched off fol- 앫 open the trunk
lowing an adjustable time delay
(컄 page 127).

106
 Controls in detail
Lighting

Manual control Courtesy lighting

Switching lamps on For better orientation in the dark, courtesy

lamps will illuminate the interior of your ve-
왘 Press switch 3.
hicle as follows:
The interior lighting switches on.
With parking lamps switched on:
Switching lamps off 앫 the door handles
왘 Press switch 3 again. 앫 the driver and passenger footwells
The interior lighting switches off. With key in starter switch position 1:
앫 the door handles
i
The setting selected for the interior 앫 the center console
lighting is used for the trunk lighting as
well.
i
If you turn the key in the starter switch
If you leave the trunk lid open for an ex- to position 0 and switch off the exterior
tended period of time, the trunk light- headlamps, the door handle lamps will
ing will switch off automatically after remain lit for approximately five min-
approximately ten minutes. utes.

107
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination To dim illumination
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
왘 Turn the reset knob in the instrument
section of this manual (컄 page 20). Use the reset knob to adjust the illumina-
cluster (컄 page 20) counterclockwise.
tion brightness for the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster is activated when
and the switches on the center console. The instrument cluster illumination will
you:
dim.
앫 open a door i
The instrument cluster illumination is Coolant temperature gauge
앫 turn on the ignition
dimmed or brightened to suit ambient
앫 press the reset knob (컄 page 20) light conditions. Under normal driving conditions, the cool-
앫 switch on the exterior lamps ant temperature may rise to 248°F
To brighten illumination (120°C). The coolant temperature may
Only opening a door will activate the in- rise to 266°F (130°C) at high outside tem-
strument cluster for approximately 왘 Turn the reset knob in the instrument peratures or when driving in hilly terrain.
30 seconds. cluster (컄 page 20) clockwise.
The engine should not be operated with
You can change the instrument cluster set- The instrument cluster illumination will the coolant temperature above 266°F
tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of brighten. (130°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
the control system (컄 page 122). gine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

108
 Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Trip odometer Tachometer Outside temperature indicator

왘 Make sure that you are viewing the trip The red marking on the tachometer de-
odometer display (컄 page 110). notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G
Press the jor k button on the mul- ! The outside temperature indicator is not de-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until
Avoid driving at excessive engine signed to serve as an Ice-Warning Device
the trip odometer appears if it is not dis-
speeds, as it may result in serious en- and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
played.
gine damage that is not covered by the Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
왘 Press and hold reset knob 4 Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
(컄 page 20) until the trip odometer is
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
reset. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
SL 55 AMG
garage), you will notice a delay before the
On the SL 55 AMG, there is no red marking lower temperature is displayed.
denoting excessive engine speed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
is interrupted if the engine is operated at perature indications caused by heat
an excessive speed. radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.

109
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the key in the starter switch is turned to Warning! G
position 1. The control system enables you The multifunction display consists of the
to A driver’s attention to the road and traffic display fields in the speedometer and the
conditions must always be his/her primary tachometer. In its default state, the left
앫 call up information about your vehicle focus when driving. display field shows the trip and main
앫 change vehicle settings For your safety and the safety of others, se- odometer, while the present outside tem-
For example, you can use the control sys- lecting features through the multifunction perature appears in the right display field.
tem to find out when your vehicle is next steering wheel should only be done by the This default setting is referred to as the
due for service, to set the language for driver when traffic and road conditions per- standard display.
messages in the instrument cluster dis- mit it to be done safely.
play, and much more. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 13.5 m) every second.

The control system relays information to 1 Main odometer

the multifunction display. 2 Trip odometer
3 Current gear selector lever position
4 Outside temperature
5 Automatic transmission program mode

110
 Controls in detail
Control system

Multifunction steering wheel 1 Left multifunction display in the Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
speedometer function steering wheel will alter what is
The displays in the multifunction display shown in the multifunction display.
and the settings in the control system are 2 Right multifunction display in the
tachometer The information available in the multifunc-
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc-
tion display is arranged in menus, each
tion steering wheel (컄 page 20). Operating the control system
containing a number of functions or sub-
3 Selecting the submenu or setting menus.
the volume
The individual functions are then found
ç down / to decrease within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
æ up / to increase erations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
4 Telephone*
tion or to customize the settings for your
í to take a call vehicle.
ì to end a call It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
5 Menu systems functions within each menu, as being ar-
ranged in a circular pattern.
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu 앫 If you press button è or ÿ re-
peatedly, you will pass through each
6 Moving within a menu menu one after the other.
j for next display
앫 If you press button k or j re-
k for previous display peatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.

111
Controls in detail
Control system

In the Settings menu, instead of functions The menus are described on the following
you will find a number of submenus for pages.
calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 119).
The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.

112
 Controls in detail
Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table below provides an overview of
through the menus. the individual menus.

113
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8

Standard dis- AUDIO NAVI Distronic* Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone
play memory
Digital speed- Select radio Activate Call up set- Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consump- Load phone
ometer station route guid- tings tion messages settings tion statistics af- book
ance ter start
Commands/submenus

Call up FSS Operate CD Instrument clus- Fuel consump- Search for

player ter submenu tion statistics name in
since the last re- phone book
set
Check tire Lighting sub- Call up range
pressure* menu
Check engine Vehicle sub-
oil level menu
Convenience
submenu

114
 Controls in detail
Control system

i Standard display menu AUDIO menu

The headings used in the menus table
You can select the functions in the stan- The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
are designed to facilitate navigation
dard display menu with button k or the audio equipment which you currently
within the system and are not neces-
j. have turned on.
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays. The following functions are available: If no audio equipment is currently turned
on the message AUDIO off is shown in the
The first function displayed in each Function Page
right display.
menu will automatically show you
Call up digital speedometer 115
which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available:
Call up FSS 242
Function Page
Check tire pressure* 236
Select radio station 116
Check engine oil level 228
Operate CD player 116
Display digital speedometer
왘 Press button j once.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the right display field.

115
Controls in detail
Control system

Select radio station 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Operate the CD player

until the desired station is found.
왘 Turn on the radio. Refer to the separate 왘 Turn on the radio and select the CD
operating instructions. The type of search depends on the set- player. Refer to the separate operating
ting for the station tuning instructions.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
(컄 page 128):
until you see the currently tuned sta- 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
tion in the right display. 앫 Memory: the next stored station is until the settings for the CD currently
selected (SP) being played are shown in the right dis-
앫 Station search play field.

i
You can only store new stations using
the designated feature on the radio.
1 Station frequency Refer to the separate operating instruc-
2 Waveband setting tions.
3 Setting for station selection using You can also operate the radio in the 1 Current track
memory usual manner. 2 Current CD (for CD changer)
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.

116
 Controls in detail
Control system

NAVI menu Distronic* menu Distronic deactivated

When Distronic is deactivated you will see
The NAVI menu contains the functions Use the Distronic menu to display the cur-
the standard display in the left display
needed to operate your navigation system. rent settings for your Distronic system.
field.
What information is shown in the left dis-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
play field depends on whether the Distron-
until you see the message NAVI in the
ic system is active or inactive.
left display.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
The message shown is the right display
tion of this manual (컄 page 171) for in-
field depends on the status of the naviga-
structions on how to activate Distronic.
tion system:
앫 If the navigation system is off, the mes- 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
sage NAVI OFF is shown in the display. until you see one of the following two 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
pictures in the display. 3 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead
앫 If the navigation system is on, the mes-
4 Your vehicle
sage NAVI READY is shown in the dis-
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
play.
function
Please refer to the COMAND manual for in-
structions on how to activate the route
guidance system.

117
Controls in detail
Control system

Distronic activated Malfunction memory menu 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly

until you see the message Malfunction
When Distronic is activated the DTR sym-
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan memory in the right display.
bol and the set speed are seen in the left
malfunction and warning messages that
display.
may be stored in the system. What infor- No malfunction messages
mation is shown in the display fields de-
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
pends on whether malfunctions have
sage in the right display is: Malfunction
actually occurred.
memory, no malfunctions.

Warning! G Malfunctions have occurred

1 Symbol for activated Distronic Malfunction and warning messages are only
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
2 Set speed indicated for certain systems and are inten-
the number of malfunctions in the right dis-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
play:
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing 1 Number of malfunctions
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
왘 Press button k or j .
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 257).

118
 Controls in detail
Control system

The stored messages will now be displayed Settings menu The following settings and submenus are
in order. See the “Practical hints” section available:
for malfunction and warning messages In the Settings menu there are two func-
(컄 page 257). tions: Function Page

The function Reset to factory set- Resetting all settings 120

Should any malfunctions occur while driv- 앫
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap- tings using reset button, with which Submenus in the Settings menu 120
pear in the right display field when the key you can reset all the settings to those Resetting the functions of a sub- 120
in the starter switch is turned to position 0 set at the factory. menu
or removed from the starter switch. 앫 A collection of submenus with which Instrument cluster submenu 122
you can make individual settings for
i Lighting submenu 124
your vehicle.
The message memory will be cleared Vehicle submenu 127
when you turn the key in the starter 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu is seen in Convenience submenu 129
switch to position 1 or 2. You will then
only see Priority 1 malfunctions the left display.
(컄 page 257).

119
Controls in detail
Control system

Resetting all settings Submenus in the Settings menu Resetting the functions of a submenu
You can reset all the functions of all sub- 왘 Press button k or j . For each submenu you can reset all the
menus to the factory settings. functions to the factory settings.
In the right display you see the collec-
왘 Press the reset knob in the instrument tion of submenus. 왘 Move to a function in the submenu.
cluster for approximately three sec- 왘 Press the reset knob in the instrument
onds. cluster for approximately three sec-
In the right display you will see the re- onds.
quest to press the reset knob again to
In the right display you will see the re-
confirm.
quest to press the reset knob again to
왘 Press the reset knob again. confirm.
왘 Press button ç .
The functions of all the submenus will 왘 Press the reset knob again.
reset to factory settings. The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. All functions of the submenu will reset
i to factory settings.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
The settings you have changed will not Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
be reset unless you confirm the action with the æ button.
by pressing the reset knob a second
Move within the submenus with the k
time.
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.

120
 Controls in detail
Control system

The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.

Instrument cluster Lighting Vehicle Convenience

Select time display mode Set daytime running Set station selection Activate easy-entry/exit
lamp mode (USA only) mode (radio) feature
Select temperature dis- Set locator lighting Set automatic locking Set key dependency
play mode
Select speedometer dis- Exterior lamps delayed Tire pressure display* Set parking position for
play mode switch-off exterior rear view mirror
Select language Interior lighting delayed
switch-off

121
Controls in detail
Control system

Instrument cluster submenu Selecting time display mode Selecting temperature display mode
Access the Inst. cluster menu via the 왘 Move the selection marker with the 왘 Move the selection marker with button
Settings menu. Use the Inst. cluster æ or ç button to the Inst. æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu to change the instrument cluster cluster submenu. submenu.
display settings. The following functions
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
are available:
until you see this message in the left until you see this message in the left
display: Clock. display: Temp. indicator.
Function Page
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
Select time display mode 122
setting. setting.
Select temperature display 122
mode
Select speedometer display 123
mode
Select language 123

왘 Press æ or ç to set the 12-hour 왘 Press æ or ç to set temperature

or 24-hour time display mode. unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).

122
 Controls in detail
Control system

Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language Available languages:

(Canada only)
왘 Move the selection marker with button 앫 German
왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
앫 English
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster submenu.
submenu. 앫 Italian
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the left 앫 French
until you see this message in the left display: Text. 앫 Spanish
display: Speedometer. The selection marker is on the current
The selection marker is on the current setting.
setting.

왘 Press æ or ç to select the lan-

왘 Press æ or ç to set the speed- guage to be used for the multifunction
ometer units to Kilometres or Miles. display messages.

123
Controls in detail
Control system

Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode With daytime running lamp mode se-
(USA only) lected and the exterior lamp switch at
Access the Lighting submenu via the Set-
position 0, the following lamps will
tings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to 왘 Move the selection marker with button
come on automatically when the en-
change the lamp and lighting settings on æ or ç to the Lighting sub-
gine is turned on:
your vehicle. The following functions are menu.
available: 앫 Parking lamps and low beam head-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
lamps
Function Page until you see this message in the left
display: Light circuit Headlamp 앫 License plate lamps
Set daytime running lamp mode 124
mode.
(USA only) i
The selection marker is on the current
Set locator lighting 125 If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
setting.
Exterior lamps delayed 125 another position, the corresponding
switch-off lamp(s) will switch on.
Interior lighting delayed 127 For safety reasons, resetting the
switch-off Lighting submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 111) will not reset the daytime
running lamp mode.
왘 Press æ or ç to select manual or In the right display you will then see the
daytime running lamp (constant) mode. message: Cannot be fully reset to
This function is not available in coun- factory settings while driv.!.
tries where daytime running lamps are
mandatory.

124
 Controls in detail
Control system

Setting locator lighting 왘 Move the selection marker with button Setting night security illumination
æ or ç to the Lighting sub- (Exterior lamps delayed switch-off)
During darkness, the following lamps will
menu
come on when the exterior lamp switch is Use the Headlamps delayed switch-off
in position U, the locator lighting fea- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly function to set whether and for how long
ture is activated, and the vehicle is un- until you see this message in the left you would like the exterior lamps to illumi-
locked by remote control: display: Locator lighting. nate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed switch-off fea-
앫 the parking lamps The selection marker is on the current
ture is activated and the exterior lamp
앫 the tail lamps setting.
switch is in position U, the following
앫 the license plate lamps lamps will remain lit after you remove the
key from the starter switch:
앫 the front fog lamps
앫 the parking lamps
To activate locator lighting:
앫 the tail lamps
왘 Make sure that the locator lighting fea-
ture is set to ON (see below). 앫 the license plate lamps
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi- sired setting. 앫 the front fog lamps
tion U. The locator lighting will be switched on To activate night security illumination:
The locator lighting switches off when the or off. 왘 Select delayed switch-off period (see
driver’s door is opened. It switches off au- below).
tomatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion U.

125
Controls in detail
Control system

i You can temporarily deactivate the de-

You can reactivate this function within layed switch-off feature:
ten minutes by opening a door. 왘 Before leaving the vehicle turn the key
If you do not open a door after remov- in the starter switch to position 0.
ing the key, the lamps will automatical- 왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
ly switch off after 60 seconds. to 0.
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired lamp-on period. The delayed switch-off feature is deac-
To select delayed switch-off period: tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
You can select: reinsert the key in the starter switch.
왘 Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting sub- 앫 0 s, the delayed switch-off feature For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
menu. is deactivated
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed ton on the gear selector (컄 page 30).
until you see this message in the left switch-off feature is activated
display: Headlamps delayed
switch-off.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

126
 Controls in detail
Control system

Interior lighting delayed switch-off Vehicle submenu

Use this function to set whether and for Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set-
how long you would like the interior light- tings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
ing to remain lit during darkness after the make general vehicle settings. The follow-
key is removed from the starter switch. ing functions are available:
왘 Move the selection marker with button Function Page
æ or ç to the Lighting sub- 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired lamp-on time period. You can se- Set station selection mode 128
menu.
lect: (radio)
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 0 s, the delayed switch-off feature Set automatic locking 128
until you see this message in the left
display: Int. lighting delayed is deactivated Tire pressure display* 129
switch-off. 앫 5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
The selection marker is on the current switch-off feature is activated.
setting.

127
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting station selection mode 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- Setting automatic locking
sired station selection mode. You can
Use the Press button in audio mode func- Use this function to activate or deactivate
select:
tion to select the manual or memory sta- the automatic central locking. With the au-
tion selection mode for the radio 앫 Memory, selects next stored station tomatic central locking system activated,
(컄 page 116). the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
앫 Station search
speeds of approximately 9 mph
왘 Move the selection marker with the
(15 km/h).
æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu. 왘 Move the selection marker with the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly æ or ç button to the Vehicle
until you see this message in the left submenu.
display: Press button in audio mode. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
The selection marker is on the current
display: Automatic door lock.
setting.
왘 The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘 Press æ or ç to switch
Automatic Door lock On or Off.

128
 Controls in detail
Control system

Tire pressure display* Convenience submenu

Use this function to set the unit for the tire Access the Convenience submenu via the
Warning! G
pressure display. Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub- You must make sure that no one can be-
menu to change the settings for a number
왘 Move the selection marker with the come trapped or injured by the moving
of convenience features. The following
æ or ç button to the Vehicle steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
functions are available:
submenu. the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
Function Page and the driver’s door is being opened or the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
key is removed from the starter switch. Do
until you see this message in the left Activate easy-entry/exit fea- 129
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
display: Tire press. display. ture
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
The selection marker is on the current Set key dependency 130 pervised use of vehicle equipment may
setting. Set parking position for exterior 131 cause an accident and/or serious personal
rear view mirror injury.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
Activating easy-entry/exit feature hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
Use this function to activate and deacti-
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
feature, which could result in an accident
feature is activated, the steering wheel and
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- and/or serious personal injury.
driver’s seat will move back to facilitate ex-
sired tire pressure unit.
iting the vehicle when you
앫 remove the key from the starter switch
앫 open the driver’s door

129
Controls in detail
Control system

After entering the vehicle, the steering 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Setting key dependency
wheel and seat will move into the position until you see this message in the left
Use this function to set whether the mem-
stored in memory when display: Easy-entry feature Acti-
ory settings for the seats, the steering
vate.
앫 the driver’s door is closed wheel and the mirrors should be stored
The selection marker is on the current separately for each key (컄 page 99).
앫 you put the key in the starter switch
setting.
and 왘 Move the selection marker with button
앫 press the appropriate stored position æ or ç to the Convenience sub-
button on the memory switch menu.
(컄 page 99) 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
i display: Key-dependent.
To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
왘 Press æ or ç to change the The selection marker is on the current
ment, press one of the following:
easy-entry/exit setting. setting.
앫 the seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 32) The following settings are available for
the easy-entry/exit feature:
앫 the steering column switch
(컄 page 34) Off The easy-entry/exit feature is
deactivated
앫 the memory switch (컄 page 99)
Steer. column
Only the steering column is 왘 Press æ or ç to set key depen-
왘 Move the selection marker with button
moved dency to On or Off.
æ or ç to the Convenience sub-
menu. Steer.col.+seat
Both the steering column and
the seat are moved

130
 Controls in detail
Control system

Setting parking position for exterior rear Trip computer menu

view mirror
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
You can store a parking position for the
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
passenger exterior rear view mirror using
information is available:
the memory switch (컄 page 100).
The exterior rear view mirror will return to Function Page
its previous position when you 왘 Press æ or ç to switch function Fuel consumption statistics after 132
On or Off. start
앫 shift out of reverse (after 10 seconds)
i Fuel consumption statistics 132
앫 exceed the speed of 6 mph (10 km/h),
The mirror parking position feature since last reset
regardless of which gear is engaged
must be activated and the passenger Call up range (distance to empty) 133
앫 press the driver’s side mirror button side exterior rear view mirror
(immediately) (컄 page 35) (컄 page 35) must be selected at the i
왘 Move the selection marker with button time in order for the system to recall the
The last function called up will reap-
æ or ç to the Convenience sub- stored mirror position when reverse
pear the next time you enter the trip
menu. gear R is engaged.
computer menu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: Mirror setting when park-
ing.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

131
Controls in detail
Control system

Fuel consumption statistics after start i Fuel consumption since last reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly All statistics stored since the last en- 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the gine start will be reset approximately until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu. four hours after the key in the starter Trip computer menu.
switch is turned to position 0 or re-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
moved from the starter switch.
until you see this message in the left until you see this message in the left
display: After start. Resetting will not occur if you turn the display: From reset.
key back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.

1 Distance driven since start 1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Average speed since start 2 Average speed since last reset
3 Time elapsed since start 3 Time elapsed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average fuel consumption since last re-
set

132
 Controls in detail
Control system

Resetting fuel consumption statistics Call up range (distance to empty) TEL menu*
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu. Trip computer menu.
Warning! G
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly A driver’s attention to the road must always
until you see the reading that you want until you see this message in the left be his/her primary focus when driving. For
to reset in the left display. display: Range. your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
왘 Press and hold the reset knob in the in- In the right display you will see the cal-
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
strument cluster (컄 page 21) until the culated range based on the current fuel
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
value is reset to 0. tank level.
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele-
phone when weather, road, and traffic con-
ditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond.

133
Controls in detail
Control system

앫 If the telephone is on: Rejecting a call

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- The telephone will then search for a If you do not wish to receive the call, you
out being connected to an external antenna) network. During this time the right dis- can choose to reject it.
from inside the vehicle while the engine is play is empty.
왘 Press button ì .
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
As soon as the telephone has found a You have rejected the call. The caller
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
network, READY is indicated in the right receives a busy signal.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
display.
personal injury.
Answering a call
You can use the functions in the TEL menu When your telephone is ready to receive
to operate your telephone, provided it is calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
connected to a hands-free system and the right display you will then see the mes-
switched on. sage:
왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND. 1 Signal strength
왘 Press button ÿ or è on the 앫 This standby message indicates that
steering wheel repeatedly until you see your telephone is ready for use and you
the TEL menu in the left display. can operate it using the control sys-
Which messages will appear in the right tem.
display field depends on whether your tele- 왘 Press button ì .
phone is switched on or off:
You have answered the call. In the right
앫 If the telephone is off, the message in display you see the length of the call.
the multifunction display is: TEL Off.

134
 Controls in detail
Control system

Ending a call When the message Please wait! dis- 앫 If connection is successful, the name of
appears, the phone book has been the party you called and the duration of
왘 Press button ì .
loaded. the call will appear in the display.
You have ended the call. In the right
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
display you will again see the standby
until the desired name appears in the
message.
right display.
Dialing a number from the phone book The stored names are displayed in in-
If your telephone is ready to receive calls, creasing or decreasing alphabetical or-
you may select and dial a number from the der.
앫 If no connection is made, the control
phone book at any time. i system stores the dialed number in the
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly If you press and hold j or k for redial memory.
until you see the TEL menu in the left longer than one second, the system
display. scrolls rapidly through the list of names
In the right display you will see the until you release the button again.
standby message. Cancel the quick search mode by
왘 Press button j or k . pressing ì.

The control system reads the phone

왘 Press button í .
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the The system dials the selected phone
right display you will see the message number.
Please wait!.

135
Controls in detail
Control system

Redialing
The control system stores the most recent-
ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
display.
In the right display you will see the
standby message.
왘 Press button í .
In the right display you see the first
number in the redial memory.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right display.
왘 Press button í .
The control system dials the selected
phone number.

136
 Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
Information for driving with an automatic The automatic transmission selects indi-
transmission is found in the “Getting start- vidual gears automatically, dependent Warning! G
ed” section (컄 page 39). upon
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
Your transmission adapts its gear shifting 앫 the selector lever position D with gear of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
process to your individual driving style by ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 139) idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
continually adjusting the shift points up or
앫 the selected shift program brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
down. These shift point adjustments are
(S/W) (컄 page 141) quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
performed based on current operating and control of the vehicle and hit someone or
driving conditions. 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
something. Only shift into gear when the en-
(컄 page 142)
If the operating conditions change the au- gine is idling normally and when your right
tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting 앫 the vehicle speed foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
its gear shift program. The current selector lever position and
shift program (S/W) appear in the When the selector lever is in position D,
tachometer display (컄 page 110). you can influence transmission shifting by
앫 limiting the gear range
앫 changing gears yourself

137
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit

To avoid overrevving the engine when 왘 Press and hold the selector lever in the
Even with an automatic transmission you
the selector lever is moved to the D– di- D+ direction until D reappears in the
can change the gears yourself when the
rection, the transmission will not shift tachometer display field.
selector lever is in position D.
to a lower gear if the engine’s revolu-
The transmission will shift from the cur-
tions per minute limit would be exceed-
Downshifting rent gear range directly to gear
ed.
range D.
왘 Briefly press the selector lever to the
left in the D– direction. Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
The transmission will shift from the cur- 왘 Briefly press the selector lever to the 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
rent gear to the next lower gear. This right in the D+ direction. in the D– direction.
action simultaneously limits the gear
range of the transmission The transmission will shift from the cur- The transmission will automatically se-
(컄 page 139). rent gear to the next higher gear as per- lect the gear range suited for optimal
mitted by the shift program. This action acceleration and deceleration. This will
simultaneously extends the gear range involve shifting down one or more
Warning! G of the transmission. gears.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.

138
 Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear ranges Gear Effect Gear Effect

range range
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by é The transmission shifts ç The transmission shifts
pressing the lever to the left (D-), and re- through fourth gear only. through second gear only.
verse the gear range limit by pressing the è The transmission shifts Allows the use of the engine’s
lever to the right (D+). through third gear only. braking power when driving
The selected gear range will appear in the With this selection you can 앫 on steep downgrades
tachometer display field. If you press on use the braking effect of the
the accelerator when the engine has 앫 in mountainous regions
engine.
reached its rpm limit, the transmission will 앫 under extreme operating
upshift beyond any gear range limit conditions
selected. æ The transmission operates
only in first gear.
For maximum use of the en-
gine’s braking effect on very
steep or lengthy downgrades.

139
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear selector lever position Effect !

N Neutral Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
Effect other reason with selector lever in N,
No power is transmitted from the en- can result in transmission damage that
P Park position gine to the drive axle. When the is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Selector position when the vehicle is brakes are released, the vehicle can Limited Warranty.
parked. Only place selector lever in be moved freely (pushed or towed).
position P when vehicle is stopped. To avoid damage to the transmis-
The park position is not intended to sion, never engage N while driving. Warning! G
serve as a brake when the vehicle is
parked. Rather, the driver should al- If ESP is deactivated or malfunction- Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
ways set the parking brake in addi- ing: lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
tion to placing the selector lever in Only move selector lever to N if the gerous. Also, position P alone is not intend-
position P to secure the vehicle. vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. ed to or capable of preventing your vehicle
on icy roads). from moving, possibly hitting people or ob-
The key can only be removed from
the starter switch with the selector D Drive jects.
lever in position P. The transmission shifts automatical- Always set the parking brake in addition to
R Reverse gear ly. All five forward gears are avail- shifting to position P (컄 page 47).
able. When parked on an incline, also turn the
Place selector lever in position R
front wheels towards the road curb.
only when vehicle is stopped.

140
 Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Program mode selector switch 앫 The vehicle starts out in second

Warning! G gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the full throttle is applied or gear
key from the starter switch, take the KEY- range 1 is selected.
LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children 앫 Traction and driving stability are im-
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to proved on icy roads.
an unlocked vehicle. Children could move 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when you
the selector lever from position P, which give more gas. The engine then oper-
could result in an accident and/or serious ates at lower rpms and the wheels are
personal injury. less likely to spin.
1 Program mode selector switch
앫 The power transmission ratio for se-
S Standard For regular driving lector lever position R changes de-
W Winter For winter driving pending on the program mode
selected (W or S).
왘 Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the letter of the
desired shift program appears in the ta-
chometer display field (컄 page 109).
Select W for winter driving:

141
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Accelerator position Steering wheel gearshift control

(Speedshift) and manual shift program
Your driving style influences the transmis- SL 55 AMG
sion’s shifting behavior:
The SL 55 AMG can be driven in both the
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
automatic and manual shift program
More throttle Later upshifting modes. In the manual shift program mode
you can change the gears yourself on the
Kickdown steering wheel or by using the selector le-
Use kickdown when you want maximum ver.
acceleration. 3 Program mode selector switch
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of S Regular For regular driving
resistance. W Winter For winter driving
The transmission shifts into a lower MANUAL For manual gear shifting
gear.
The selected shift program (S/W/M) is indi-
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have cated in the tachometer display field
reached the desired speed. (컄 page 109).
The transmission shifts up again.
1 Left button: downshift
2 Right button: upshift
To do so, you must first select the manual
shift program M on the program mode se-
lector switch.

142
 Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Activating steering wheel gearshift Downshifting Deactivating steering wheel gearshift

control control
왘 Press the button located on the left
왘 Press the program mode selector side of the steering wheel. 왘 Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the M for manu- switch repeatedly until S or W appears
or
al shift program appears in the tachom- in the tachometer display field.
eter display field. 왘 Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D– direction. i
Automatic gear shifting is deactivated.
The transmission shifts to the next At each engine start, the transmission
lower gear. will go into the last shift program mode
Upshifting
selected (S or W). Only program mode M
왘 Press the button located on the right is not stored and will not be recalled
side of the steering wheel. Warning! G when engine is restarted.
or On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
왘 Briefly press the selector lever to the in order to obtain braking action. This could
right in the D+ direction. result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
The transmission shifts to the next
vent this type of loss of control.
higher gear.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ating temperature has been reached. Shift
into reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.

143
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode)

If vehicle acceleration worsens or the

transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
mission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘 Stop the vehicle.
왘 Move selector lever to P.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least ten seconds before re-
starting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Move selector lever to position D (for
2nd gear) or R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

144
 Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 44) and for setting the rear view Warning! G Warning! G
mirrors (컄 page 35) is found in the “Get-
ting started” section. The automatic antiglare function does not In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
react if incoming light is not aimed directly may escape from the mirror housing if the
Rear view mirror at sensors in the inside rear view mirror. mirror glass breaks.
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not low the liquid to come into contact with
react, for example, if the wind screen is in- eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
The reflection brightness of the exterior stalled. In case it does, immediately flush affected
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and area with water, and seek medical help if
Glare can endanger you and others.
the inside rear view mirror will respond au- necessary.
tomatically to glare when
앫 the ignition is switched on, and Warning! G !
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on Electrolyte drops coming into contact
the sensor in the inside rear view mir- Exercise care when using the passenger with the vehicle paint finish can be
ror. side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror completely removed only while in the
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface liquid state by applying plenty of water.
The rear view mirror will not react if for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
앫 reverse gear is engaged are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your
앫 the interior lighting is turned on
shoulder before changing lanes.

145
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Headlamp cleaning system Sun visors

The switch is located on the left side of the The sun visors protect you from sun glare
dashboard. while driving.

Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Mounting
can endanger you and others. 2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
왘 Swing sun visors down when you expe- 4 Holder for gas cards
1 Headlamp washer switch rience glare.
왘 To use mirror, lift up cover 2.
왘 Switch on ignition.
i
왘 Press switch 1.
If sunlight enters through a side win-
dow, disengage sun visor from
Rear window defroster
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
For information on the rear window de- The mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
froster (컄 page 153).

146
 Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control

147
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Item Item
1 Center air vent, adjustable 1 Temperature control, left
2 Center air vent, fixed 2 Air distribution, left (automatic or
3 Air temperature controls for cen- manual operation)
ter and side air vents 3 Defrosting
4 Air volume control for center and 4 Air recirculation
side air vents 5 Rear window defroster
5 Center air vent, adjustable 6 Air distribution, right (automatic or
6 Side defroster vent manual operation)
7 Side air vent, adjustable 7 Temperature control, right
8 Automatic climate control panel 8 Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
Automatic climate control panel
i 9 Residual heat/ventilation
For draft-free ventilation, move the slid- 10 Air volume control (automatic, man-
ers for the center air vents to the mid- ual)
dle position.
11 AC cooling on/off

148
 Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

The automatic climate control is operation- i i

al whenever the engine is running. You can If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate When operating the climate control
operate the climate control system in ei- the interior before driving off. system in automatic mode, you will
ther the automatic or manual mode. The only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
system cools or heats the interior depend- Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris. ture, air volume and air distribution.
ing on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature. When the retractable hardtop is closed, Increasing
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and do not obstruct air flow by placing ob-
jects on the air flow-through exhaust 왘 Turn the outer adjustment ring slightly
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
slots below the rear window. to the right.
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system. The automatic climate control system
Setting the temperature will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Warning! G Use the temperature controls 1 and 7 to
separately adjust the air temperature on Decreasing
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
each side of the passenger compartment.
ing and cooling given on the following pag- 왘 Turn the outer adjustment ring slightly
You should raise or lower the temperature
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, to the left.
setting in small increments, preferably
impairing visibility and endangering you and
starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic climate control system
others.
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.

149
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting the temperature for center Turning on cooler air Adjusting air volume
and side air vents
왘 Press the right button (blue).
Use the air volume control 10
When outside temperatures are low, you
The indicator lamp on the button lights (컄 page 148) for both automatic and man-
can manually raise the air temperature for
up. Cooler air will enter from the center ual air volume adjustment.
the center and side air vents. The
and side air vents.
controls 3 are located between the center
Adjusting manually
air vents (컄 page 147).
Turning off cooler air
왘 Press the control knob.
Turning on warm air 왘 Press the right button (blue).
The U light on the control knob
왘 Press the left button (red). The indicator lamp on the button goes goes out. You can now select one of
out. The air from the outlets will return nine air volume settings.
The indicator lamp on the button lights
to the temperature set in the system.
up. Warm air will enter from the center
Adjusting automatically
and side air vents.
왘 Press the control knob.
Turning off warm air The U light on the control knob
왘 Press the left button (red). comes on. The airflow is adjusted auto-
matically.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air from the outlets will return
to the temperature set in the system.

150
 Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting air distribution Adjusting automatically Defrosting

왘 Press the control knob.
Use the air distribution controls 2 and 6 i
(컄 page 148) to separately adjust the air The U light on the control knob
These settings should only be selected
distribution on each side of the passenger comes on. The air distribution is adjust-
for a short time.
compartment. The following symbols are ed automatically.
found on the controls:
Windshield fogged on the outside Activating
Symbol Function 왘 Press button P (컄 page 148).
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on.
h Directs air through the cen- The indicator lamp on the button lights
왘 Turn the air distribution control to h
ter air vents up.
or k.
j Directs air to the windows
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL Deactivating
V Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior 왘 Press button P (컄 page 148).
If the left and right air distribution controls
k Directs air to the footwells The indicator lamp on the button goes
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for out. Defrosting is turned off.
Adjusting manually cooling, the display MAXCOOL lights up on
왘 Press the control knob. the left and right temperature controls.
The U light on the control knob This provides the fastest possible cooling
goes out. The air distribution can be ad- of the vehicle interior (when retractable
justed manually. hardtop is closed).

151
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Air recirculation mode i i

If you keep button , pressed, the If you keep button , pressed, the
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
side windows will close. side windows will return to their previ-
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
The air recirculation mode is activated ous position.
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the automatically
air in the passenger compartment. The air recirculation mode is deactivated
앫 at high outside temperatures automatically
앫 if the concentration of carbon mon- after five minutes if the outside temper-
Warning! G oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
앫
ature is below approximately 41°F
side air increases, for example in a (5°C)
When the outside temperature is below tunnel
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation 앫 after five minutes if the air conditioner
mode for short periods to prevent window If you have turned off the air condition- is turned off
fogging. er (컄 page 155) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
air recirculation mode will not switch ature is above approximately 41°F
Activating (5°C)
on automatically.
왘 Press button , (컄 page 148). At outside temperatures above 79°F
The indicator lamp on the button lights Deactivating (26°C) the system will not automatically
up. switch back to outside air. A quantity of
왘 Press button , (컄 page 148).
outside air is added after approximately
The indicator lamp on the button goes 30 minutes.
out.

152
 Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Rear window defroster Deactivating !

왘 Press button F (컄 page 148) again. If the rear window defroster switches
The rear window defroster uses a large off too soon and the indicator lamp
amount of power. To keep the battery The indicator lamp on the button goes
starts blinking, this means that too
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost- out.
many electrical consumers are operat-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
defroster is automatically deactivated af-
ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
Warning! G cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
ation depending on the outside Any accumulation of snow and ice should be the rear window defroster.
temperature. removed from the rear window before driv-
As soon as the battery has sufficient
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
Activating voltage, the rear window defroster au-
endangering you and others.
tomatically turns itself back on.
왘 Press button F (컄 page 148).
The indicator lamp on the button lights !
up. The rear window defroster cannot be
switched on when the retractable hard-
top is open. The indicator lamp will
start blinking if the hardtop is open.
앫 Close the retractable hardtop.
The rear window defroster can again be
turned on.

153
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Residual heat and ventilation Deactivating Deactivating the automatic climate

control system
왘 Press button T (컄 page 148).
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior The indicator lamp on button T i
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes goes out.
This setting is only recommended when
use of the residual heat produced by the The residual heat is automatically turned the retractable hardtop is open.
engine. off:
i 앫 when the ignition is switched on Deactivating
How long the system will provide heat- 앫 after about 30 minutes It is possible to completely deactivate the
ing depends on the coolant tempera- automatic climate control system.
ture and the temperature set by the 앫 if the battery voltage drops
왘 Press button M (컄 page 148).
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu- The indicator lamp on button M
tion control setting. comes on.

Activating
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or remove it from the starter
switch.
왘 Press button T (컄 page 148).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.

154
 Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Reactivating Air conditioning Activating

There are several ways to reactivate the Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioning is operational while
automatic climate control system: dehumidify the air with the air condition-
the engine is running and cools the interior
ing.
왘 Press any button on the automatic cli- air to the temperature set by the operator.
mate control panel (컄 page 148). 왘 Press ACOFF again (컄 page 148).
i
The indicator lamp on button M The indicator lamp on the
Condensation may drip out from under-
switches off. button ACOFF goes out.
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
or not an indication of a malfunction. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
왘 Turn one of the control knobs on the
Deactivating which are harmful to the ozone layer.
automatic climate control.
The indicator lamp on button M It is possible to deactivate the air condi- !
switches off. tioning (cooling) function of the automatic If the ACOFF button on the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehi- climate control panel starts to blink,
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu- this indicates that the air conditioning
midified. is losing refrigerant. The compressor
왘 Press button ACOFF (컄 page 148). has turned itself off. The air condition-
ing cannot be turned on again.
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up. 앫 Have the air conditioner checked at
the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

155
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Ventilated storage compartments

The glove box and the armrest storage

compartment are have their own air vents
that allow for cooling ventilation when the
automatic climate control system is acti-
vated.

i
You should keep these air vents closed
when outside temperatures are low. Glove box Storage compartment under the armrest
1 Thumbwheel 1 Thumbwheel
2 Air vent 2 Air vent

Opening the air vent Opening the air vent

왘 Turn the wheel 1 upwards. 왘 Turn the wheel 1 to the right.

Closing the air vent Closing the air vent

왘 Turn the wheel 1 downwards. 왘 Turn the wheel 1 to the left.

156
 Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
If the window encounters an obstruction
Warning! G that blocks its path in a circumstance where
The side windows can be opened and
When closing the windows, make sure that you are closing the window by pulling the
closed electrically. The switches for all the
there is no danger of anyone being injured switch to its resistance point and holding it
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
by the closing procedure. there, by pressing and holding button ‹
switch for the passenger side is on the pas-
on the SmartKey, or by pressing and holding
senger door. The closing of the door windows can be im- the lock button (vehicles with
mediately halted by releasing the switch, or, KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the auto-
if the switch was pulled past the resistance matic reversal function will not operate.
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
If the window encounters an obstruction KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
that blocks its path in a circumstance where you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave chil-
you pulled the switch past the resistance dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
point and released it to close the window, cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
the automatic reversal function will stop the use of vehicle equipment can cause an acci-
window and open it slightly. dent and/or serious personal injury.
1 Left front and rear windows
2 Right front and rear windows

157
Controls in detail
Power windows

Opening the front side windows Opening the rear side windows Fully closing the front side windows
왘 Press switch 1 or 2. 왘 Open the front window. 왘 Pull on switch 1 or 2 past the point of
resistance and release.
The window (left or right) will move If the hardtop is open, the respective
downwards until you release the rear window will open automatically as If the upward movement of the window is
switch. soon as the front window is completely blocked during the closing procedure, the
If the hardtop is open, the respective open. window will stop and open slightly.
rear window will open automatically as If the hardtop is closed:
soon as the front window is completely Stopping the front side windows
왘 Press again on switch 1 or 2.
open. 왘 Press or pull respective switch again.
The rear window will open completely.
Closing the front side windows Synchronizing power windows
Closing the rear side windows
왘 Pull on switch 1 or 2. The side power windows must be resyn-
왘 Close the front window. chronized each time after the battery has
The window (left or right) will move up-
왘 Pull again on switch 1 or 2. been disconnected:
wards until you release the switch.
If you pull and hold the switch up when The rear window will close completely. 왘 Pull the power window switches until
closing the window, and upward move- the side windows are closed and hold
ment of the window is blocked by some Fully opening the front side windows the switches for approximately one
obstruction including but not limited to second.
왘 Press switch 1 or 2 past the point of re-
arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automat- sistance and release.
ic reversal will not operate.

158
 Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Retractable hardtop
Opening and closing the retractable !
hardtop Warning! G When opening and closing the retract-
able roof, make sure that
For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
can only be opened and closed when the key from starter switch, take the KEY- 앫 there is sufficient clearance for the
vehicle is standing still. LESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you, hardtop to move up and the trunk
and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children lid to move back
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
Warning! G an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
앫 the luggage cover is extended and
closed
vehicle equipment can cause an accident
Before operating the switch for the retract- 앫 the trunk lid is closed
and/or serious personal injury.
able hardtop, make sure that no persons are
injured by the moving parts (retractable 앫 no roof luggage carrier is installed
roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to inat- ! 앫 the outside temperature is above
tention. Never sit or place heavy objects on the +5°F (–15°C)
Hands must never be placed near the roof rear shelf. Doing so could cause dam-
Otherwise the roof and trunk of the ve-
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf age to the retractable hardtop and the
hicle could be damaged.
behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the re- rear shelf.
tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the re-
tractable hardtop switch. This immediately
interrupts the raising or lowering procedure.
You then can operate the hardtop switch to
raise or lower the hardtop away from the
danger zone.

159
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Luggage cover Opening luggage cover Opening the retractable hardtop with
the switch
The luggage cover is located in the trunk. 왘 Unhook luggage cover from side hold-
ers.
왘 While holding onto the handle 1, guide
luggage cover back into its storage
compartment.

!
To prevent damage to the hardtop or
luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
앫 load trunk only to the height of the
1 Handle luggage cover Hardtop switch
2 Holders 앫 do not permit luggage/cargo to Before pulling on the hardtop switch, you
push up the closed luggage cover must make sure that:
Closing luggage cover 앫 the parking brake is engaged
앫 do not load anything on top of or in
왘 Pull out the luggage cover using the front of the luggage cover (컄 page 41)
handle 1. 앫 the luggage cover is closed, see Lug-
앫 do not place anything on the shelf
왘 Hook the luggage cover into the left behind the roll bar gage cover
and right side holders 2. 앫 the trunk lid is closed
앫 the ignition is switched on (key in start-
er switch position 2)

160
 Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

왘 Pull up on the hardtop switch as indi- Closing the retractable hardtop with 왘 Press the hardtop switch as indicated
cated by the arrow until the hardtop is the switch by the arrow until the hardtop is com-
completely lowered into its trunk stor- pletely closed and locked and the indi-
age compartment and the indicator cator lamp in the hardtop switch goes
lamp in the hardtop switch goes out. out.
The multifunction display will briefly The multifunction display will briefly
show the message Hardtop open. show the message Hardtop closed.

i
Be sure that the roof is dry before you
Warning! G
open it. Otherwise water may enter the
If the retractable hardtop is not fully opened
trunk interior.
Before pressing the hardtop switch, you or closed, a warning will sound after 15 sec-
must make sure that: onds, pressure in the hardtop’s hydraulic
system will drop and the hardtop will lower.
앫 the parking brake is engaged
(컄 page 41) Be sure to keep the hardtop switch pulled or
pressed until the hardtop is fully opened or
앫 the luggage cover is closed closed. The hydraulic pump will then shut
(컄 page 160) off.
앫 the trunk lid is closed To prevent possible accidents, drive the ve-
앫 the ignition is switched on (key in start- hicle only with the hardtop either completely
er switch position 2) closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.

161
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Locking the retractable hardtop after Unlocked status noticed when stopped 왘 To lock the hardtop in its fully closed
raising/lowering position, press hardtop switch forward.
왘 Switch on the ignition.
The message Hardtop Closed will be
왘 To lock the hardtop in its fully closed
Warning! G position, press hardtop switch forward.
shown in the multifunction display.

The message Hardtop Closed will be or:

The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or
not fully opened and locked if: shown in the multifunction display. 왘 To lock the hardtop in its fully opened
position, pull up on the hardtop switch.
앫 the indicator light in the hardtop switch or:
remains lit The message Hardtop Open will be
왘 To lock the hardtop in its fully opened
앫 the message Hardtop in operation! shown in the multifunction display.
position, pull up on the hardtop switch.
is shown in the multifunction display
and the indicator lamp in the hardtop The message Hardtop Open will be
switch does not go out shown in the multifunction display.
앫 the indicator lamp blinks and a warning
sounds for 10 seconds and the message Unlocked status noticed while driving
Lock hardtop is shown in the multi-
function display when starting to drive Warning! G
If the retractable hardtop is not properly Stop the vehicle and lock the hardtop before
locked, lock it as described below. continuing to drive. You could otherwise en-
danger yourself and others.

왘 Stop the vehicle.

왘 Leave the ignition switched on.

162
 Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Opening the retractable hardtop with

Warning! G the key

If the retractable hardtop does not com-

pletely open or close, the roof hydraulics will Warning! G
lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is
Before operating the switch for the retract-
lowered
able hardtop make sure that no persons are
앫 after approximately seven minutes injured by the moving parts (retractable
when the ignition is switched on roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to inat-
앫 after approximately 15 seconds when tention.
the ignition is switched off 왘 Aim the transmitter eye at the door
Hands must never be placed near the roof handle.
Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
warning will sound and the hardtop switch behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the re- 왘 Press and hold button Œ until the
lamp will blink. In the speedometer display tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered. retractable hardtop is completely
you will see K, in the tachometer display Serious personal injury may occur. open.
you will see the message being lowered!
If potential danger exists, release the re- The seat ventilation switches on. The
앫 Properly lock the retractable hardtop spective button on the SmartKey. This im- rear side windows open. In the tachom-
(컄 page 162) before continuing to drive mediately interrupts the raising or lowering eter display you will see the message
procedure. You then can operate Πor Hardtop open.
‹ to raise or lower the hardtop away
from the danger zone.

163
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Closing the retractable hardtop with Problems when operating the retract- 앫 The hardtop drive system has shut it-
the key able hardtop self down. For safety reasons, no more
than five consecutive attempts may be
왘 Aim the transmitter eye at the door
Indicator lamp in the retractable hard- made to raise or lower the hardtop.
handle.
top switch is blinking
왘 After about ten minutes you may
왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the
Several problems may cause the indicator again attempt to open or close the
retractable hardtop is completely
lamp in the hardtop switch to blink when retractable hardtop again.
closed.
activated:
The retractable hardtop and the side If the indicator lamp in the retractable
windows close. In the tachometer dis- 앫 The luggage cover in the trunk is not hardtop switch blinks when starting off or
play you will see the message Hardtop closed. while driving and you hear a warning sound
closed. 왘 Close the luggage cover in the for a maximum of 10 seconds, the retract-
trunk. able hardtop is not locked.
왘 Properly lock the retractable hardtop
Warning! G 앫 The trunk lid is open.
(컄 page 162) before continuing to
왘 Close the trunk lid. drive.
If the retractable hardtop does not com-
pletely open or close a warning sounds and 앫 The battery voltage is too low. If the indicator lamp continues to blink af-
the retractable hardtop switch blinks. In the 왘 Start engine and let run while acti- ter you have carried out the above actions,
speedometer display you will see K, in vating switch. there is a malfunction.
the tachometer display you will see the mes-
왘 Have the retractable hardtop system
sage being lowered!. After about
checked at an authorized
15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pres-
Mercedes-Benz Center.
sure.
Properly lock the retractable hardtop
(컄 page 162) before continuing to drive.

164
 Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Indicator lamp in the retractable hard- Wind screen

top switch lights when vehicle is
stopped
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp in the retractable
hardtop switch lights while the vehicle is The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vi-
standing still and the switch was not acti- sion to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
vated, then the retractable hardtop is not possible accident when visibility is limited
locked. (e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
screen should be folded back.
왘 Properly lock the retractable hardtop
(컄 page 162) before continuing to 1 Guide tabs
drive. The wind screen deflects drafts away from
the driver and passenger when the hardtop 왘 Slide the wind screen into the roll bar
is lowered. It is stored in a separate stor- until the guide taps on each side latch
The retractable hardtop will not lock
age bag. underneath the roll bar. Make sure that
There is a malfunction in the retractable the fastening straps do not get caught.
hardtop system.
Installing 왘 Raise the roll bar slightly (컄 page 61).
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
왘 Leave the wind screen folded and place
Center.
it on the roll bar.

165
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Removing 왘 Lower the roll bar. Make sure that the

fastening straps do not get caught.
왘 Fold the upper section of the wind
screen back down. 왘 Pull the wind screen out towards the
front of the vehicle. Be careful not to
왘 Raise the roll bar slightly (컄 page 61).
damage interior trim with the guide
tabs.
왘 Place the wind screen back into the
bag.

2 Close the fastening straps Sunshade for panorama roof*

왘 Guide the fastening straps around the The sunshade protects you from excessive
top of the roll bar and close the buck- sunlight coming in through the panorama
les. roof.
왘 Tighten the fastening straps if neces- 1 Release button
sary. Warning! G
왘 Undo the buckles on the upper section
왘 Lower the roll bar. of the roll bar by pressing the release Do not operate the sunshade while driving.
왘 Fold the upper section of the wind button 1. Adjusting the sunshade while driving could
screen up towards the head restraints cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-
until it stops. cle.

166
 Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

1 Stop buttons
2 Handle

Closing
왘 Using the handle 2, slide the sunshade
towards the front of the vehicle.

Opening
왘 Squeeze the stop buttons 1 and guide
the sunshade towards the rear.

167
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control and Distronic*, with The cruise control is a convenience system
the speed you set for your vehicle.
which the vehicle can maintain a preset designed to assist the driver during vehicle
speed Use of cruise control is recommended for
operation. The driver is and must always re-
driving at a constant speed for extended
앫 ABC with vehicle level control systems, main responsible for the vehicle speed and
periods of time. You can set any speed
with which you can change vehicle sus- for safe brake operation.
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
pension characteristics Only use the cruise control if the road,
The cruise control function is operated by traffic, and weather conditions make it ad-
앫 Parktronic*, which assists the driver
means of the cruise control lever. visable to travel at a steady speed.
during parking maneuvers
The cruise control lever is the uppermost 앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The driving systems BAS, ABS, SBC, and
lever found on the left-hand side of the ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
ESP are described in the “Safety” section
steering column (컄 page 18). because conditions do not allow safe
(컄 page 68).
driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate the cruise control when driv-
ing in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

168
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

i !
On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise Moving gear selector lever to
control may not be able to maintain the position N while driving also cancels
set speed. Once the grade eases, the cruise control. However, the gear se-
set speed will be resumed. lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
Canceling cruise control when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
i
왘 Step on the brake pedal.
2 Set current or lower speed The last stored speed is canceled when
3 Cancel cruise control or you turn off the engine.
4 Resume at previously set speed 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Saving current speed
The cruise control will be canceled. The
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired last speed set will be stored for later
speed. use.
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control is activated.

169
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting stored speed (“Resume” Setting a higher speed i

function) When you use the cruise control lever
왘 Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de- to decelerate, the transmission will au-
Warning! G sired speed is reached. tomatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehi-
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The speed stored in memory should only be cle sufficiently.
set again if prevailing road conditions per- The new speed is set.
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration Fine adjustment in 1 mph (1 km/h) in-
differences arising from returning to the pre- i crements
set speed could cause an accident and/or Depressing the accelerator pedal does
serious injury to you and others. not deactivate the cruise control. After Faster
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
cruise control will resume the last 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to direction of arrow 1.
speed set.
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last Slower
Setting a lower speed
previously set speed. 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
왘 Depress the cruise control lever to
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator position 2 and hold it down until the direction of arrow 2.
pedal. desired speed is reached.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.

170
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic*
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, weather and traffic con-
Warning! G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
ditions and to provide the steering, braking Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
cruise control system increases the driving
and other driving inputs necessary to retain tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
convenience afforded by the cruise control
control of the vehicle. mend that you review the following
during travel on expressways and other
major roads. information carefully before operating the
system.
앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects Warning! G
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so Distronic is a convenience system, its speed i
that you follow that vehicle at a preset adjustment reduction capability is intended For operation in the USA only: This de-
distance. to make cruise control more effective and vice complies with Part 15 of the
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
you, Distronic will function in the same however, intended to, nor does it, replace following two conditions:
way as cruise control (컄 page 168). the need for extreme care. The responsibili-
앫 This device may not cause harmful
ty for the vehicle speed and the distance to
interference, and
the vehicle ahead, including most impor-
Warning! G tantly brake operation to assure safe stop- 앫 this device must accept any inter-
ping distance, always rests with the driver. ference received, including interfer-
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub- ence that may cause undesired
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does operation.
ditions into account.
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
Any unauthorized modification to this
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
device could void the user’s authority
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distron-
to operate the equipment.
ic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicle’s braking power.

171
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic is designed and intended only to

Warning! G Warning! G maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- Close attention to road and traffic condi- tance from moving objects in front of it.
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
the weather and traffic conditions make it whether or not Distronic is activated.
advisable to travel at a steady speed. Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi- The “Resume” function should only be oper-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
Warning! G speed. ously set speed and wishes to resume this
Distronic will not react to stationary objects particular preset speed.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
Switch off Distronic:
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain, 앫 when changing from the left to the right
snow or sleet. lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.

172
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic displays in the speedometer The intermittent warning sound ceases

dial and the red DTR warning lamp E Warning! G
goes out when the necessary distance
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly An intermittent warning sounds and the
to the vehicle ahead is again estab-
ahead, the DTR indicator lamp E in the DTR warning lamp (red) in the speedometer
lished.
speedometer dial lights up white. dial is illuminated if the Distronic system cal-
If the distance to the vehicle ahead is too culates that the distance to the vehicle
small for the DTR to be able to maintain the ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indi-
preset distance, the DTR warning lamp cate that Distronic will not be capable of
E in the speedometer lights up red. slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
the preset following distance, which creates
If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
a danger of a collision.
ger of collision
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
앫 the DTR warning lamp E in the
the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
speedometer lights up red
The warning sound is intended as a final cau-
앫 an intermittent warning sounds tion that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
a collision.
eration of the warning signal to intercede
Under no circumstances should the with your own braking, as that will result in
driver await the intermittent warning 1 Red DTR warning lamp E potentially dangerous emergency braking
sound before braking. See warning which will not always result in an impact be-
note to the right. ing avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

173
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic menu in the control system Distronic deactivated

Warning! G In the Distronic menu you can read the cur- When Distronic is deactivated you will see
The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a rent settings for Distronic. What appears in the standard display in the left display
maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corre- the left display field depends on whether field.
sponds to about 20% of the maximum decel- the Distronic is turned on or off.
eration ability of your vehicle. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to until you see one of the following dis-
restore the preset distance or to maintain plays.
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically
applied as this happens which results in the
brake pedal moving. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
3 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead
cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
4 Your vehicle
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
movement which could interfere with the
function
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.

174
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic activated Cruise control lever Activating Distronic

When Distronic is activated the DTR sym- The Distronic system is operated by means You can activate Distronic if
bol and the set speed are seen in the left of the cruise control lever.
앫 you are driving over 25 mph
display.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost (Canada: 40 km/h)
lever found on the left-hand side of the 앫 ESP is activated (컄 page 70)
steering column.
When Distronic is activated the speedome-
ter display will show a message such as
DTR 60 mph.
If Distronic is deactivated, the speedome-
1 Symbol for activated Distronic ter display will show the message
2 Set speed DTR --- mph.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫 up to two minutes after starting the en-
1 Set current or higher speed gine
2 Set current or lower speed 앫 when you brake
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at previously set speed 앫 if you have set the parking brake
앫 if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N.

175
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed

왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired 왘 Lift the cruise control lever to
speed. position 1 (컄 page 175) and hold it up
until the desired speed is reached.
왘 Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever. 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The current speed is set. The new speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator i
pedal.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
i not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
celeration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
If you do not take your foot off of the
control will resume the last speed set.
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the speedome-
1 Set speed ter display field:
2 White DTR indicator lamp E DTR override. The distance to a slower
moving vehicle in front of you will not
i be set. Your vehicle speed will then be
The vehicle speed displayed on the determined only by the accelerator
speedometer can briefly vary from the pedal position.
speed setting on the distronic system.

176
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 5 mph Resetting stored speeds

(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
왘 Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 (컄 page 175) and hold it
Faster
Warning! G
down until the desired speed is
reached. 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the The speed stored in memory should only be
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 175). set again if prevailing road conditions per-
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
The new speed is set. Slower differences arising from returning to the pre-
set speed could endanger yourself and oth-
i 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
ers.
When you use the cruise control lever direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 175).
to decelerate, the transmission will au-
Fine adjustment in 1 mph 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
tomatically downshift if the rate of de-
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 175).
celeration is too low.
Distronic is set to the last stored
Faster speed.
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 175). pedal.
or
왘 Pull and hold the cruise control lever in
the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 175)
and hold it until you reach the desired
speed.

177
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when Setting the following distance in
Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the 앫 you set the parking brake
Distronic system: You can set the specified following for Dis-
앫 you drive slower than 25 mph
tronic by varying the time setting between
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the (Canada: 40 km/h)
1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time set-
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 175). 앫 ESP is active (컄 page 70) or you deac- ting and the current speed of your vehicle,
or tivate ESP Distronic calculates and sets the required
왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 You move the transmission selector le- following distance to the vehicle ahead.
ver into position N. The set distance will be shown in the
Distronic will be deactivated. The last speedometer display field.
speed set will be stored into memory. A signal will sound. The DTR off mes-
sage appears in the speedometer dis- The thumbwheel for making the time set-
i play for approximately five seconds. ting is located on the lower section of the
The last stored speed is deleted when center console.
you turn off the engine.
Warning! G
Warning! G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
the minimum speed of 25 mph ( 40 km/h) select the appropriate setting given road
by operation of the system. At that time the conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
driver must apply the brakes in order to re- style and applicable laws and driving recom-
duce vehicle speed further or bring it to a mendations for safe following distance.
stop.

178
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Decreasing distance Distance warning function

Decreasing the distance setting tells Dis- When Distronic is deactivated, this func-
tronic to maintain a smaller following dis- tion will continue to warn you if you are fol-
tance to the vehicle ahead. lowing too close to the vehicle ahead:
왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ® . 앫 The DTR warning lamp E lights up
red.
앫 An intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.

1 Distance warning function on/off If these warnings are issued, you must
switch brake manually to maintain a safe distance
2 Thumbwheel for setting distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells Dis-
tronic to maintain a greater following dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ¯ .

179
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating Driving with Distronic

Warning! G 왘 Press switch 1. This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is re-
If the DTR warning lamp (red) E in the The indicator lamp on the switch lights
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
speedometer dial lights up while driving up. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
pared to brake in such situations. This will
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im- the speedometer display (컄 page 174).
mediate attention on the part of the driver is deactivate the Distronic system.
required. Deactivating
As required by the traffic situation, apply the 왘 Press switch 1.
brakes and navigate around a possible ob-
The indicator lamp on the switch goes
stacle. However, do not drive by relying on
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in
the distance warning function, as this will re-
the speedometer display.
sult in an emergency braking application.
Especially depending on road surface condi-
tions and driver reaction, this will not always
enable you to avoid a collision.

i
Complex driving situations are not al-
ways fully recognized by Distronic. This
could result in wrong or missing dis-
tance warnings.

180
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Turns and bends

The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
Warning! G serve all traffic and intercede as required by
Distronic works to maintain the speed se- steering or braking the vehicle.
lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol- Warning! G
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis-
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
road conditions.
앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
앫 While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
system is a dirty sensor (located behind a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
the hood grill), especially at times of snow one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it. Your vehicle could then accelerate and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Dis- to brake late or unexpectedly.
to the previously selected speed. tronic will switch off, and the message
DISTRONIC - CLEAR SENSOR! appears in
Distronic regulates only the distance be-
the multifunction display.
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
in the road, e.g.: sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 246).
앫 a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫 a disabled vehicle
앫 an oncoming vehicle

181
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles

A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient traveling near the edge of the roadway has
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the vehicle ahead. not yet been detected by Distronic. There
cient distance to the vehicle ahead. will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.

182
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Active Body Control (ABC) The ABC switch with the indicator lamp is Suspension for sporty driving style
located in the lower section of the center
The setting for sporty driving is selected
The ABC system automatically selects the console.
when the indicator lamp 2 is illuminated.
optimum suspension tuning and ride
height for your vehicle. 왘 Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to: Suspension for regular driving style
앫 Your driving style The setting for regular driving is selected
when the indicator lamp 2 is off.
앫 Road surface conditions
왘 Press switch 1.
앫 The vehicle loading
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
앫 Your choice of suspension style, 1 ABC switch
“sporty” or “regular”, which you select 2 Indicator lamp
using the ABC switch.
왘 Start the engine.
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the key is re-
moved from the starter switch.

183
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Vehicle level control i

Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride These height adjustments are so small
Warning! G
height to: that you may not notice any change.
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
앫 reduce fuel consumption and feet away from wheel housing area, and
Select the level 1 and 2 settings only when stay away from under the vehicle when low-
앫 increase vehicle safety required by current driving conditions. ering the vehicle chassis.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Otherwise:
lowered according to the selected level 앫 Fuel consumption may increase.
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫 Handling may be impaired.
앫 With increasing speed, ride height is re-
duced by up to approximately one inch
(25 mm).
앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.

184
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

The following vehicle level settings can be

selected when the vehicle is stationary:

Vehicle level when Use for Height increase over Automatic lowering Indicator lamps
stationary normal (컄 page 185)
Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.5 in (12 mm) Both lamps off
Level 1 Driving with snow chains Max. 0.6 in (15 mm)1 Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) One lamp on
(컄 page 240)
Level 2 Very rough road surface Max. 1.0 in (25 mm)1 Max. approx. 1.0 in (25 mm) Both lamps on
conditions
1
Dependent on loading

The switch and the indicator lamps are lo- i

cated in the lower section of the center Pressing the switch twice in quick suc-
console. cession will cause the vehicle to imme-
왘 Briefly press switch 3 to change from diately raise or lower to the new vehicle
one level setting to the next. level as selected.
At level 1, indicator lamp 2 is illuminat- The selected vehicle level setting re-
ed and at level 2 both indicator lamps mains stored in memory even if the en-
are illuminated. When the vehicle is at gine is turned off and restarted.
level 2, pressing the switch will return
the vehicle to normal level. 1 Indicator lamp 1
2 Indicator lamp 2
3 Vehicle level control switch

185
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Parktronic system* The Parktronic system monitors the sur-

Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
Warning! G Make sure that no persons or animals are in rear bumper.
the area in which you are maneuvering. Oth-
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is erwise you run the risk of causing injury.
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park-
always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by tivated when you switch on the ignition
the system and can damage the vehicle. and release the parking brake. The Park- 1 Sensors in the front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic tronic system deactivates at speeds over
can be affected by dirty sensors, especially 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the
at times of snow and ice. See Cleaning the Parktronic system turns on again.
Parktronic system sensors (컄 page 246).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.

186
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Range of the sensors Rear sensors Minimum distance

To function properly, the sensors must be
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
free of dirt, ice snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
scratch or damage the sensors.
! If you encounter an obstacle in this range,
During parking maneuvers, pay special all the warning lamps light up and you hear
attention to objects located above or a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer
below the height of the sensors (e.g. than the minimum distance, the actual dis-
planters or trailer hitches). The Park- tance may no longer be indicated by the
tronic system will not detect such ob- system.
jects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result. Warning indicators

Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc- Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham- ative distance between the sensors and an
Front sensors mers) may impair the operation of the obstacle. The warning indicator for the
Parktronic system. front area is located above the center air
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) vents in the dashboard. The warning indi-
cator for the rear area is integrated in the
Corners approx. 48 in (120 cm)
rear trim.

187
Controls in detail
Driving systems

The position of the gear selector lever de- 앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
termines which warning indicators will be warning will sound when the first seg-
activated. ment lights up. This signal quickens
with each additional segment lit. When
Selector lever Warning indicator the eighth segment illuminates, the
position acoustic warning becomes a constant
D Front area activated signal. The signal is canceled when the
selector lever is placed in position D
R or N Rear area activated or P.
P Neither activated
Front area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle As your vehicle approaches an object, one
2 Right side of the vehicle or more segments will light up, depending
on the distance. When the eighth segment
Each warning indicator is divided into six
lights, you have reached the minimum dis-
yellow and two red segments for either
tance.
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is ready when the border around the indi- 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic
cator is illuminated. warning will sound as the seventh seg-
ment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of three
seconds will sound for the eighth seg-
ment.

188
 Controls in detail
Driving systems

Switching the Parktronic system Switching on the Parktronic system If only the red segments of the Parktronic
on/off warning indicator light up and no warning
왘 Press switch 1 again.
sounds, then the sensors of the Parktronic
You can switch off the Parktronic system
The indicator lamp 2 goes out. system are dirty or malfunctioning. Mal-
manually.
function may also be caused by interfer-
The Parktronic switch is located in the low- Parktronic malfunction ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals.
er section of the center console. There is a malfunction in the Parktronic The Parktronic system will switch itself off
system if the red segments of the Park- after 20 seconds.
tronic warning indicator light up and a 왘 Clean Parktronic system sensors
warning sounds. The Parktronic system (컄 page 246).
will switch itself off after 30 seconds and
the indicator lamp on the Parktronic switch 왘 Switch on the ignition.
lights up. or
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked 왘 Check Parktronic operation at another
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- location to rule out interference from
ter as soon as possible. outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
1 Parktronic on/off switch
2 Indicator lamp

Switching off the Parktronic system

왘 Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 comes on.

189
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces Glove box Cup holders
An AUX socket to the audio system for por-
table audio devices is installed in the glove
Warning! G box.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on shelf be-
hind roll bar. 1 Left cup holder
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob- 2 Right cup holder
jects.
Opening
1 Button to open
2 Glove box 왘 Briefly press cup holder cover.
Warning! G
The cup holder opens automatically.
Opening the glove box
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 왘 Press button 1.
about and injuring vehicle occupants during The glove box lid opens downward.
an accident.
Closing the glove box
왘 Push lid up to close.

190
 Controls in detail
Useful features

Auxiliary cup holder

Warning! G You can fasten the auxiliary cup holder
When not in use, keep the cup holder onto the left front side of the passenger
closed. Place only containers that fit into the seat.
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to Inserting the auxiliary cup holder
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
2 Auxiliary cup holder
3 Insert
왘 Press the auxiliary cup holder 2 in the
direction of the arrow until it snaps in
place.
You can now place a larger container in
1 Cover the holder. For even larger containers
왘 Pull up the cover and place it in a you can take out the insert 3. Make
storage compartment. sure that the container does not press
against the glove box.

191
Controls in detail
Useful features

Removing the auxiliary cup holder

Warning! G 왘 Pull the auxiliary cup holder 2
When not in use, remove the auxiliary cup (컄 page 191) up and out of the recep-
holder. Place only containers that fit into the tacle and place it in a storage compart-
auxiliary cup holder to prevent spills. Use ment.
lids on open containers and do not fill con- 왘 Replace the cover 1 (컄 page 191) on
tainers to a height where the contents, es- the opening and press it down until it
pecially hot liquids, could spill during vehicle snaps in place.
maneuvers.
Door storage compartments 1 Release button
i 2 Lid
When you move the seat forward, the Warning! G
Opening
auxiliary cup holder turns to the side.
Keep the door storage compartments 왘 Press the release button.
When you move the seat back, turn the closed while vehicle is in motion. Failure to
auxiliary cup holder back until it stops do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the
The lid opens upwards.
in its original position. rear and prevent proper positioning of the
seat belt.

192
 Controls in detail
Useful features

Armrest storage spaces Opening storage tray Rear storage compartments

The buttons are located under the cushion 왘 Press button 1 and lift up the armrest. The CD changer is located in the left stor-
of the armrest. age compartment.
Opening storage compartment
For instructions on the CD changer, see
왘 Press button 2 and lift the armrest. separate COMAND Operator’s Manual.

Locking the storage spaces

The storage spaces are centrally locked
when you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
You can also lock the storage spaces
separately, see “Locking the storage com-
1 Button to open storage tray partments separately” (컄 page 194).
2 Button to open storage compartment
1 Release button
2 Lid
왘 Press the release button.
The lid opens upwards.

193
Controls in detail
Useful features

Locking the storage compartments 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the Unlocking the storage compartments
separately glove box lock and turn it to position 3. separately
You can lock the storage compartments The following storage areas will be 왘 Turn the mechanical key in the glove
separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the locked. They can then not be opened box lock to position 1.
shop for service. with the key or with the KEYLESS-GO*
You can now open the storage com-
card:
partments.
앫 Glove box
앫 Armrest storage spaces Parcel net in passenger footwell

앫 Rear storage compartments

Warning! G
i
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
The separate locking status of these
jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
storage compartments can only be
canceled by means of the mechanical In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
1 Separately unlock storage compart- key. den maneuvers, they could be thrown
ments around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
The storage compartments in the doors
2 Centrally lock/unlock storage com- to vehicle occupants.
cannot be locked.
partments
3 Separately lock storage compartments
왘 Slide mechanical key out of key hous-
ing (컄 page 290).

194
 Controls in detail
Useful features

Parcel net in trunk Luggage compartment in the rear

There are three nets available in the trunk
to secure loads: Warning! G
앫 a pocket net on each side of the right
Secure all pieces of luggage in the rear with
and left trunk side walls
the luggage straps. Unsecured pieces of lug-
앫 a trunk floor net gage can otherwise cause injury during a
왘 Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk braking maneuver and can increase the risk
back wall towards the front over the of injury in an accident.
luggage. Never allow anyone to ride in the rear.
왘 Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes The luggage straps can only secure light lug-
on the trunk floor. gage items. Carry heavy pieces of luggage in
the trunk.
The rear compartment area is not designed
or intended to accommodate occupants. Se-
vere personal injury or death may result in
an accident.

1 Holder
2 Strap
3 Latch
4 Release button

195
Controls in detail
Useful features

왘 Pull the strap 2 out of the holder 1. Ashtray Removing the ashtray insert
왘 Secure the luggage with the strap so
that it cannot move. Warning! G
왘 Insert the strap in the latch 3.
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
Releasing the strap
from movement. Move gear selector lever to
왘 Press the release button 4 and guide position N. With gear selector lever in
the strap back to the holder. position N, turn off the engine.

Warning! G 왘 Secure vehicle from movement by set-

1 Cover plate ting the parking brake. Move the selec-
The shelf below the rear window should not 2 Sliding knob tor lever to position N.
be used to carry objects. This will avoid such
Now you have more room to take out
objects from being thrown about and injur- Opening ashtray
the insert.
ing vehicle occupants during an accident or
왘 Briefly touch the cover plate 1.
sudden maneuver. 왘 Press the sliding knob 2 to the right.
The ashtray opens automatically.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- The insert will eject a short distance.
jects.
Replacing the ashtray insert
왘 Press the insert into the frame until it
snaps into place.

196
 Controls in detail
Useful features

Cigarette lighter Heated steering wheel* (Canada

Warning! G only–model SL 500)
The lighter socket can be used to accom-
modate electrical accessories up to a Never touch the heating element or sides of The steering wheel heating warms up the
maximum of 180 W. the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the leather area of the steering wheel.
knob only.
The lever is on the lower left-hand side of
When leaving the vehicle always remove the the steering wheel.
key from the starter switch. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.

1 Cigarette lighter
왘 Switch on the ignition.
왘 Push in the cigarette lighter 1. 1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
The lighter will pop out automatically 3 Switching off
when hot.

197
Controls in detail
Useful features

Switching on Easy-Pack load assist in the trunk Raising the hardtop

왘 Make sure that the ignition is switched
To facilitate trunk loading after opening the
on.
lid, use the Easy-Pack feature to raise the Warning! G
All the lamps in the instrument cluster retracted hardtop from its storage position
To prevent injuries, make sure that there is
should light up. in the trunk.
no possibility of body parts getting caught in
왘 Turn lever in the direction of arrow 1. moving parts. If potential danger exists,
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator press the switch again. This will immediately
lamp 2 lights up. stop the movement of the hardtop.

Switching off The hardtop can only be raised when the

luggage cover is closed and the trunk lid is
왘 Turn lever in the direction of arrow 3.
completely opened.
The steering wheel heating is turned
off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. 왘 Press button 3.
The hardtop rises a short distance.
i 1 Retracted hardtop
Button 3 lights up brightly. You can
The steering wheel heating does not 2 Luggage cover
now open the luggage cover.
turn off automatically. 3 Easy-Pack button

198
 Controls in detail
Useful features

Lowering the hardtop Electrical outlet Telephone*

The hardtop can only be lowered when the
luggage cover is closed and the trunk lid is
completely opened.
Warning! G
왘 Close the luggage cover. Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
왘 Press button 3.
out being connected to an external antenna)
The hardtop lowers. Button 3 is dimly from inside the vehicle while the engine is
lit. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
!
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
Only close the trunk if the roof is com- An electrical outlet is located on the right personal injury.
pletely lowered. Otherwise you could side of the trunk.
damage the hardtop. 왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
If you begin to close the trunk lid before position 1 or 2. phone or a citizens band unit, should only
the hardtop is completely lowered, the 왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
button 3 will blink and a warning will (cigar lighter type). nected to an antenna that is installed on
sound. the outside of the vehicle.
i The external antenna must be approved by
The electrical outlet can be used to ac- Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
commodate electrical consumers (e.g. rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a max- tion on the installation of an approved
imum of 180 W. external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.

199
Controls in detail
Useful features

Tele Aid
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Warning! G (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately !
Please do not forget that your primary re-
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec- The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
ond. tem may only be performed by com-
attention to the road must always be
pleting the subscriber agreement and
his/her primary focus when driving. For
You can take and place telephone calls us- placing an acquaintance call using the
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ing the í and ì buttons on the SOS button. Failure to complete either
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- of these steps will result in a system
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone functions, use the control system that is not activated. If the system is
phone call.
(컄 page 133). not activated the indicator lamp in the
If you choose to use the telephone1 while SOS button stays on after turning key
driving, please use the hands-free device See separate instruction manual for in- in starter switch to position 2, or press-
and only use the telephone when road, structions on how to operate the tele- ing KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (if
weather, and traffic conditions permit. phone. so equipped) twice to position 2
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from (컄 page 30) and the message Tele Aid
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- not activated will be shown in the
hicle. multifunction display for approx.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- 10 seconds.
agement and Data System)1 if road, weath- If you have any questions regarding ac-
er, and traffic conditions permit. tivation, please call the Response Cen-
1
Observe all legal requirements ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

200
 Controls in detail
Useful features

The Tele Aid system i System self-check

(Telematic Alarm Identification on De- The SOS button is located above the in- Initially, after turning the key in the starter
mand) side rear view mirror. switch to position 2, malfunctions are de-
The Roadside Assistance button • tected and indicated (the indicator lamps
The Tele Aid system consists of three
and the Information button ¡ are in the SOS button, the Roadside Assis-
types of response:
located below the center armrest cov- tance button • and the Information
앫 automatic and manual emergency button ¡ stay on longer than
er.
앫 roadside assistance and 10 seconds or do not come on). The mes-
sage Tele Aid – Visit workshop! ap-
앫 information. Shortly after the completion of your Ac-
pears for approx. 10 seconds in the
quaintance Call, you will receive a user ID
The Tele Aid system is operational provid- multifunction display.
and password via first call mail. By visiting
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
(USA only), you will have access to account
lular and GPS coverage is available.
information, remote door unlock, and
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can more.
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To !
raise, press button æ and to lower, The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
press button ç . network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
lites for vehicle location. If either of
Roadside Assistance button • or
these signals are unavailable, the Tele
the Information button ¡, depend-
Aid system may not function and if this
ing on the type of response required.
occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.

201
Controls in detail
Useful features

Emergency calls Once the emergency call is in progress, the

Warning! G An emergency call is initiated automatical-
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Emergency call –
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in ly:
Connecting call appears in the multifunc-
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in 앫 following an accident in which the tion display. When the connection is estab-
the Information button do not come on dur- emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) lished, the message Emergency call –
ing the system self-check, or if any of these or airbags deploy, Call connected appears in the multifunc-
indicators remain illuminated continuously tion display. All information relevant to the
앫 if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
in red and/or the message TELE AID - emergency, such as the location of the ve-
alarm stays on for more than
VISIT WORKSHOP! is displayed in the mul- hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys-
tifunction display after the system tion system), vehicle model, identification
tem (컄 page 75) and tow-away alarm
self-check, a malfunction in the system has number and color are generated.
(컄 page 77).
been detected.
An emergency call can also be initiated A voice connection between the Response
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined Center and the occupants of the vehicle
manually by opening the cover next to the
above, the system may not operate as ex- will be established automatically soon af-
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
pected. Have the system checked at the ter the emergency call has been initiated.
briefly pressing the button located under
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as When a voice connection is established the
the cover. See below for instructions on
possible audio system mutes and the message
initiating an emergency call manually.
Tele Aid Emergency call active appears
in the multifunction display. The Response
Center will attempt to determine more pre-
cisely the nature of the accident provided
they can speak to an occupant of the vehi-
cle.

202
 Controls in detail
Useful features

The Tele Aid system is available if: Initiating an emergency call manually
앫 it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
for monitoring services, connection luminated continuously and there was no
and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center
앫 the relevant cellular phone network established, then the Tele Aid system could
and GPS signals are available and pass not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
the information on to the response cen- vant cellular phone network is not available).
ter. The message Emergency call –
Call failed appears in the multifunction
i display for approx. 10 seconds. 1 Cover
Location of the vehicle on a map is only Should this occur, assistance must be sum- 2 SOS button
possible if the vehicle is able to receive moned by other means.
signals from the GPS satellite network 왘 Briefly press on cover 1.
and pass the information on to the re- The cover will open.
sponse center.
왘 Press the SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘 Close the cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.

203
Controls in detail
Useful features

Roadside Assistance button • A voice connection between the Roadside

Warning! G Located below the center armrest cover is
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the the Roadside Assistance button •.
voice connection is established the audio
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve- 왘 Press and hold the button (for longer system mutes and the message Tele Aid
hicle in a dangerous road location), please than 2 seconds) Roadside assistance call active ap-
do not wait for voice contact after you have pears in the multifunction display.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
sistance dispatcher will be initiated. 왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
The button will flash while the call is in sistance.
tion. The Response Center will automatically
progress. The message Roadside as-
contact local emergency officials with the
sistance – Connecting call will ap-
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
pear in the multifunction display. dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- When the connection is established, the tow your vehicle to the nearest
pants. message Roadside assistance – Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
Call connected appears in the multifunc- as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans- ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man-
mit data generating the vehicle ual for more information.
identification number, model, color and lo-
cation (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).

204
 Controls in detail
Useful features

These programs are only available in the If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Information button ¡
USA: Assistance button • is illuminated Located below the center armrest cover is
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such continuously and there was no voice the Information button ¡.
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or connection to the Response Center es-
tablished, then the Tele Aid system 왘 Press and hold the button (for longer
the replacement of a flat tire with the
could not initiate a Roadside Assis- than 2 seconds).
vehicle spare tire are obtainable,
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
앫 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func- phone network is not available). The ter will be initiated. The button will
tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road- message Roadside assistance – flash while the call is in progress. The
side Assistance dispatcher to Call failed appears in the multifunc- message Info – Connecting call will
download malfunction codes and actu- tion display. appear in the multifunction display.
al vehicle data.
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter- When the connection is established, the
i minated using the ì button on the message Info – Call connected appears
The indicator lamp in the Roadside As- multifunction steering wheel. in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
sistance button • remains illumi- system will transmit data generating the
nated in red for approx. 10 seconds vehicle identification number, model, color
during the system self-check after turn- and location (subject to availability of cel-
ing the key in the starter switch to lular and GPS signals).
position 2 (together with the SOS but- A voice connection between the Customer
ton and the Information button ¡). Assistance Center representative and the
See system self-check (컄 page 201) occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
when the indicator lamp does not light lished. When a voice connection is estab-
up in red or stays on longer than ap- lished the audio system mutes and the
proximately 10 seconds. message Tele Aid – Info call active
appears in the multifunction display.

205
Controls in detail
Useful features

Information regarding the operation of the Tele Aid system could not initiate Upgrade Signals
your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz an Information call (e.g. the relevant The Tele Aid system processes calls using
Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products cellular phone network is not avail- the following priority.
and services is available to you. able). The message Info Call failed
appears in the multifunction display. 앫 Automatic emergency – First priority
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and Information calls can be terminated us- 앫 Manual emergency – Second priority
use your ID and password (sent to you sep- ing the ì button on the multifunc- 앫 Roadside assistance – Third priority
arately) to learn more (USA only). tion steering wheel.
앫 Information – Fourth priority
i Should a higher priority call be initiated
!
The indicator lamp in the Information while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
button ¡ remains illuminated in red ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
ing after pressing one of the buttons or
for approx. 10 seconds during the sys- propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
tem self-check after turning key in the certain information such as vehicle identi-
the Tele Aid system has detected a
starter switch to position 2 (together fication number or customer information is
fault or the service is not currently ac-
with the SOS button and the Roadside not available, the operator may need to re-
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
Assistance button •). transmit.
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
See system self-check (컄 page 201) the system checked or contact the Re- During this time you will hear a beep and
when the indicator lamp does not light sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
up in red or stays on longer than ap- the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Cana- contact will resume once the retransmis-
proximately 10 seconds. da) as soon as possible. sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
ed, a beep will be heard and the
If the indicator lamp in the Information appropriate indicator lamp will stop flash-
button ¡ is illuminated continuous- ing. The COMAND system operation will
ly and there was no voice connection to resume.
the Response Center established, then

206
 Controls in detail
Useful features

! i Remote door unlock

If the indicator lamp continues to flash When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
or the system does not reset, contact the COMAND system audio is muted tentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the
the Response Center at and the selected mode (radio or CD) reserve key is not handy:
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mer- installed) switches off. If you must use
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
cedes-Benz Customer Assistance at this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
1-800-FOR-MERCedes Disconnect the coiled cord and place
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus- the call. The navigation system (if en- You will be asked to provide your pass-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in gaged) will continue to run. The display word which you provided when you
Canada. in the instrument cluster is available for completed the subscriber agreement.
use and spoken commands are only 왘 Then return to your vehicle and press
i available by pressing the RPT button on trunk lock for minimum of 20 seconds
the COMAND unit. A pop-up window until the SOS button is flashing.
The indicator lamp in the respective
will appear in the COMAND display to
button flashes until the call is conclud- The message Emergency call –
indicate that a Tele Aid call is in
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a Call connected appears in the multi-
progress.
Response Center or Customer Assis- function display.
tance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
calls, which can also be terminated by cle via Internet using the ID and password
pressing button ì on the multifunc- sent to you shortly after the completion of
tion steering wheel. your Acquaintance Call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.

207
Controls in detail
Useful features

i Stolen vehicle tracking services Garage door opener

The remote door unlock feature is avail- In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The built-in remote control is capable of
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
왘 Report the incident to the police operating up to three separately controlled
work is available.
The police will issue a numbered inci- objects.
The SOS button will flash and the mes-
dent report. You can program the signal transmitter
sage “Emergency call Call connected”
Pass this number on to the keys.
will appear in the multifunction display 왘
to indicate receipt of the door unlock Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
command. with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
sponse Center specialist will attempt The Response Center will then attempt
to establish voice contact with the ve- to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
hicle occupants. Aid system. Once the vehicle is locat-
ed, the Response Center will contact
If the trunk button was pressed for
the local law enforcement and you. The
more than 20 seconds before door un-
vehicle’s location will only be provided
lock authorization was received by the
to law enforcement. Remote control integrated into the inside
Response Center, you must wait
rear view mirror
15 minutes before pressing the trunk
button again. 1 Indicator lamp
2 Hand-held remote control trans-
mitter
3, 4, 5 Signal transmitter key

208
 Controls in detail
Useful features

i tegrated remote control located on the

Warning! G For operation in the USA only: This de- inside rear view mirror, keeping the in-
vice complies with Part 15 of the dicator lamp in view.
When programming a garage door opener,
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the 왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
the door moves up or down.
following two conditions: press the hand-held transmitter button
When programming or operating the remote and the desired integrated remote con-
control, make sure there is no possibility of 앫 This device may not cause harmful
interference, and trol button. Do not release the buttons.
anyone being injured by the moving door.
앫 this device must accept any inter- The indicator lamp on the integrated
ference received, including interfer- remote control will flash, first slowly
i and then rapidly. The rapid flashing
ence that may cause undesired
Certain types of garage door openers lamp indicates successful program-
operation.
are incompatible with the integrated ming of the new frequency signal.
opener. If you should experience diffi- Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority 왘 When the indicator lamp flashes rapid-
culties with programming the transmit-
to operate the equipment. ly, release both buttons.
ter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call 왘 To program the remaining two buttons,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Programming or reprogramming the in- repeat the steps.
Center (in the USA only) at tegrated remote control
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer i
왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 2.
Service (in Canada) at If, after repeated attempts, you do not
1-800-387-0100. 왘 Hold the end of the hand-held transmit- successfully program the integrated re-
ter of the device you wish to train mote control device to learn the signal
approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to of the hand-held transmitter, the ga-
12 cm) away from the surface of the in- rage door opener could be equipped
with the “rolling code feature”.

209
Controls in detail
Useful features

Rolling code programming 왘 Press “training” button on the garage Canadian programming
door opener motor head unit.
To train a garage door opener (or other roll- During programming, your hand-held
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea- The “training light” is activated. transmitter may automatically stop trans-
ture, follow these instructions after mitting.
You have 30 seconds time to initiate the
completing the “Programming” portion of
following step. 왘 Continue to press and hold the inte-
this text. (A second person may make the
왘 Firmly press and release the pro- grated remote control transmitter but-
following training procedures quicker and
grammed integrated remote control ton (refer to step two through four in
easier.)
transmit button. the “Programming” portion) while you
왘 Locate training button on the garage press and re-press (“cycle”) your
door opener motor head unit. 왘 Press and release same button a sec- hand-held transmitter every two sec-
ond time to complete the training pro- onds until the frequency signal has
Exact location and color of the button may
cess. been learned.
vary by garage door opener brand. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting but- Some garage door openers may require Upon successful training, the indicator
ton, refer to garage door opener Opera- you to do this procedure a third time to lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
tor’s Manual. complete the training. after several seconds.
왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmit-
ter.

210
 Controls in detail
Useful features

Operation of remote control

왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 2.
왘 Select and press the appropriate but-
ton to activate the remote controlled
device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.

Erasing the remote control memory

왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 2.
왘 Simultaneously hold down the left and
right side buttons for approximately
20 seconds, or until the control lamp
blinks rapidly.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.

i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.

211
212
 Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

213
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle !
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later cles:
on.
앫 During the first 1000 miles
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first (1500 km) do not exceed a speed
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads speeds above 4500 rpm in each
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Avoid accelerating by kickdown. to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
down by shifting to a lower gear using the engine or the rear differential has been
the selector lever. replaced.

앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when !

driving at moderate speeds (for hill Always obey applicable speed limits.
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.

214
 Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-

pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/ or taking drugs Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are a very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
앫 keep tires at the recommended infla- tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
앫 remove unnecessary loads and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
앫 allow engine to warm up under low load
cident is sharply increased when you drink
use
or take drugs and drive.
앫 avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
eration
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
앫 have all maintenance work performed drugs.
at regular intervals by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.

215
Operation
Driving instructions

Power assistance Brakes

A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
Warning! G towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Warning! G
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
The brake system requires electrical energy After driving in heavy rain for some time
the ground is only permissible for distances
for operation. without applying the brakes or through wa-
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply ter deep enough to wet brake components,
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more infor-
or electrical system In such a case, the red the first braking action may be somewhat
mation, refer to "Towing the vehicle"
brake warning lamp (컄 page 253) and warn- reduced and increased pedal pressure may
(컄 page 325).
ing messages (컄 page 265) in the instru- be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
With the engine not running, there is no fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
ment cluster light up while driving. To brake,
power assistance for the steering system. In in front.
the driver must then apply significantly
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
greater brake pedal pressure and depress Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
the pedal much further to obtain the expect- cause excessive and premature wear of the
essary to steer the vehicle.
ed braking effect. If necessary, apply full brake pads.
pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only It can also result in the brakes overheating
applied to the front wheels. Stopping dis- thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tance is increased! If there is a malfunction tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
in the SBC brake system, we recommend vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
that the vehicle be transported with all dent.
wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap-
propriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.

216
 Operation
Driving instructions

To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may !
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly be the reason for low brake fluid in the res- When driving down long and steep
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the ervoir. grades, relieve the load on the brakes
vehicle with considerable force prior to by shifting into a lower gear to use the
Have the brake system inspected at an au-
parking. The heat generated serves to dry engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
the brakes. vent overheating of the brakes and re-
ately.
If your brake system is normally only sub- duces brake pad wear.
All checks and service work on the brake
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
system should be carried out by an autho-
sionally test the effectiveness of the After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
brakes by applying above-normal braking on for some time, rather than immediately
pressure at higher speeds. This will also Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec- parking, so the air stream will cool down
enhance the grip of the brake pads. ommended by Mercedes-Benz. the brakes faster.

!
Be very careful not to endanger other
Warning! G
road users when you apply the brakes. If other than recommended brake pads are
Refer to the description of the Brake installed, or other than recommended brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 69). fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
If the parking brake is released and the safe braking is substantially impaired. This
brake warning lamp in the instrument clus- could result in an accident.
ter stays on, there is a malfunction in the Be certain to read and observe the warning
SBC brake system (컄 page 72) or the notices on brake pad replacement
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. (컄 page 74).

217
Operation
Driving instructions

Driving off Parking

앫 take the key and the KEYLESS-GO* card
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) and lock
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after vehicle when leaving
driving off. Perform this procedure only Warning! G
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- !
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not Set the parking brake whenever park-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
place full load on the engine until the oper- ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
leaves can come into contact with the hot
ating temperature has been reached. move selector lever to position P.
exhaust system, as these materials could be
When starting off on a slippery surface, do ignited and cause a vehicle fire. In addition, when parking on hills, turn
not allow one drive wheel to spin for an ex- front wheels towards the road curb.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
tended period with the ESP switched off.
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
!
앫 Move the selector lever to position P.
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re- 앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
duces engine performance and causes 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
premature brake and drivetrain wear. wheels towards the road curb.
앫 Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).

218
 Operation
Driving instructions

Tires The tread wear indicator appears as a solid

band across the tread. Warning! G
Warning! G Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- driving with a flat tire or driving at high
As tread depth approaches 1/16 in
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
(1.5 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet
you should turn on the hazard warning flash- heat build-up and possibly a fire.
road are sharply reduced.
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from Depending upon the weather and/or road
Hydroplaning
the road. surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely. Depending on the depth of the water layer
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Specified tire pressures must be main- at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re- tained. This applies particularly if the tires vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
pairs. are subjected to extreme operating condi- road and apply brakes cautiously in the
tions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high rain.
ambient temperatures).
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.

219
Operation
Driving instructions

Tire traction greater than when the road is not covered Despite the tire rating, local speed limits
with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate cau- should be obeyed. Use prudent driving
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or tion. speeds appropriate to prevailing condi-
icy road is always lower than on a dry road. tions.
You should pay particular attention to the Tire speed rating
condition of the road whenever the outside Warning! G
temperatures are close to the freezing SL 500
point. Even when permitted by law, never operate
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
Warning! G of 168 mph (270 km/h).
mum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction SL 500 with Sport Package* and tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
will be substantially reduced. Under such SL 55 AMG ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake sibly resulting in an accident and/or
with extreme caution. Your vehicle is factory equipped with personal injury and possible death, for you
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating and for others.
of 168 mph (270 km/h) or “Y”-rated tires,
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated which have a speed rating of 188 mph
radial-ply tires for the winter season for all (300 km/h) i
four wheels to insure normal balanced Information on driving with snow
handling characteristics. On packed snow, An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of chains (컄 page 240).
they can reduce your stopping distance as
compared with summer tires. Stopping 155 mph (250 km/h).
distance, however, is still considerably i
Information on tire speed rating for
winter tires (컄 page 239).

220
 Operation
Driving instructions

Winter driving instructions We therefore recommend depressing the

brake pedal periodically when traveling at Warning! G
The most important rule for slippery or icy length on salt-strewn roads.
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
This can bring road salt impaired braking sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
efficiency back to normal. Be very careful pipe and from around the vehicle with the
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
that you carry out these braking maneu- engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
system under such conditions.
vers without endangering any other road monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, users. terior resulting in unconsciousness and
move selector lever to position N. Try to
If the vehicle is parked after being driven death.
keep the vehicle under control by correc-
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
tive steering action.
cy should be tested as soon as possible af- open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
ter driving is resumed while observing the hicle not facing the wind
Warning! G safety rules in the previous paragraph.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift

in order to obtain braking action. This could Warning! G
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
signed to serve as an Ice-Warning Device
vent this type of control loss.
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af- ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal face is free of ice.
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
For more information on winter driving
(컄 page 239).

221
Operation
Driving instructions

Standing water Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio trans-

mitters
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or Warning! G COMAND, radio and telephone
water of unknown depth.
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
If you must drive through standing wa- ly as possible. Warning! G
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
entering the passenger compartment den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary re-
or the engine compartment. Water in around inside the vehicle, and cause injury sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
these areas could cause damage to to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
electrical components or wiring of the securely fastened in the vehicle. agement and Data System), radio or tele-
engine or transmission, or could result phone1 if road, weather, and traffic
in water being ingested by the engine The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- conditions permit.
through the air intake, causing severe jects.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
internal engine damage. Any such dam- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
age is not covered by the Mer- Driving abroad covering a distance of approximately
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
ond.
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
1
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas Observe all legal requirements.
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

222
 Operation
Driving instructions

Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
Warning! G monolithic type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
out being connected to an external antenna)
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire.
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
ommended maintenance instructions as
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
outlined in your Service Booklet.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury. !
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- verters, only use premium unleaded
phone or a citizens band unit should only gasoline in this vehicle.
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
nected to an antenna that is installed on
operation should be repaired promptly.
the outside of the vehicle.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in- may reach the catalytic converter caus-
structions regarding use of an external an- ing it to overheat, which could start a
tenna. fire.

223
Operation
Driving instructions

Emission control Coolant temperature

Warning! G
Certain systems of the engine serve to During severe operating conditions and
keep the toxic components of the exhaust Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
gases within permissible limits required by your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon perature may rise close to approx. 266°F
law. monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- (130°C).
sciousness and lead to death.
These systems, of course, will function The engine should not be operated with
properly only when maintained strictly ac- Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F
cording to factory specifications. Any ad- (such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
justments on the engine should therefore ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas gine damage which is not covered by the
be carried out only by qualified fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni- have the cause determined and corrected
cians. Engine adjustments should not be immediately. If you must drive under these
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified conditions, drive only with at least one win- Warning! G
service jobs must be carried out regularly dow fully open at all times.
앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing re- heated can cause some fluids, which
quirements. For details refer to the Service may have leaked into the engine com-
Booklet. partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
riously burned.
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until it cools down.

224
 Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
왘 Remove the key from the starter 왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
Warning! G switch. right.

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
It burns violently and can cause serious inju- the point indicated by the arrow. ened.
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid The fuel filler flap springs open. 왘 Close the fuel filler flap.
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on You should hear the latch close shut.
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
to it until possible pressure is released.
flame or smoking materials near gasoline! i
왘 Take off the cap and set it in the recess
Only use premium unleaded gasoline
on the fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap is located on the with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with unit cuts out – do not top up or over- Information on gasoline quality can
the remote control or the KEYLESS-GO* fill. normally be found on the fuel pump.
card automatically locks/unlocks the fuel
More information on gasoline can be
filler flap.
Warning! G found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 344).
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas
i
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz- Leaving the engine running and the fuel
zle, which could cause personal injury. cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 256).

225
Operation
At the gas station

Check regularly and before a long trip Engine oil level

More information on engine oil can be
found in the Checking engine oil level sec-
tion on (컄 page 228).
Opening hood see (컄 page 227).

Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness.More infor-
mation on replacing light bulbs can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
1 Windshield washer and headlamp (컄 page 295).
cleaning system Exterior lamp switch see “Switching on
More information on refilling the reser- headlamps” (컄 page 43).
voir can be found in the “Operation”
section on (컄 page 233). Tire inflation pressure
2 Brake fluid More information on tire inflation pressure
More information on brake fluid can be can be found in the “Tires and wheels” sec-
found in the “Technical data” section tion (컄 page 234).
(컄 page 342).
3 Coolant level
More information on coolant can be
found in the “Coolant” section on
(컄 page 230).

226
 Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull lever 1 downwards. 왘 Push lever 2 on the hood upwards.
The hood is unlocked. 왘 Pull up on the hood and then release it.
Warning! G ! The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- struts.
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
wiper arms are folded forward away
be forced open by passing air flow.
from the windshield. Warning! G
Opening To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or may even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
2 Lever for opening the hood
1 Hood release

227
Operation
Engine compartment

Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
앫 the vehicle is new
away from the vehicle and do not open the
hood until the engine has cooled. If neces- 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of ap- 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at high-
sary, call the fire department. proximately 11/2 ft (50 cm). er engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
왘 Check to make sure that the hood is be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G fully closed.
Checking engine oil level
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not When checking the oil level the vehicle
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it must
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. 앫 be parked on level ground
socket) of the ignition system
앫 be at normal operating temperature
앫 with the engine running
앫 have been stationary for at least five
앫 while starting the engine minutes with the engine turned off
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually

228
 Operation
Engine compartment

You can check the engine oil level on the One of the following messages will sub- 왘 Unscrew the cap from the filler neck 1.
multifunction display. sequently appear in the indicator: Be careful not to overfill with oil.
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to 앫 Engine oil level OK Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
position 2. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
앫 Engine oil add 1.0 qt (1.0 li-
entering the ground or water.
The standard display (컄 page 110) should ter)!
appear in the multifunction display fields. 앫 Engine oil add 1.5 qt (1.5 li- !
왘 Press button k or j on the ters)! Excessive oil must be siphoned or
steering wheel until the following mes- drained off. It could cause damage to
앫 Engine oil add 2.0 qt (2.0 li-
sage is seen in the right display field: the engine and catalytic converter not
ters)!
Measurement correct only if veh. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
level Adding engine oil Warranty.

왘 Screw the cap back on the filler neck.

After about three seconds this mes- 1 Filler neck

sage is displayed: Engine oil level –
Measuring now!

229
Operation
Engine compartment

Other display messages If you see the message: Oil level in the ABC system
Engine oil level – Not while engine on
If there is excessive engine oil with the en-
The oil level in the ABC system does not
gine at normal operating temperature, the 왘 Turn off the engine. If engine is at nor-
need to be checked. If there is visible oil
following message will appear: mal operating temperature, wait five
loss or if malfunction messages appear in
Engine oil level – Reduce oil level! minutes before checking oil. If the en-
the display, have an authorized
gine is not yet at normal operating tem-
왘 Have excess oil siphoned. Mercedes-Benz Center check the ABC
perature, you must wait 30 minutes
If the key is not turned to position 2 in the system.
before checking oil.
starter switch:
Engine oil level – Switch on ignition!
More information on engine oil can be Coolant
found in the “Technical data” section
왘 Switch on the ignition. (컄 page 343). The engine coolant is a mixture of water
If you see the message: and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
Observe waiting time Transmission fluid level the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
왘 Wait five minutes before repeating The transmission fluid level does not need must be cool.
check procedure. to be checked. If you notice transmission
The coolant expansion tank is located on
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
the passenger side of the engine compart-
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ment.
check the automatic transmission.

230
 Operation
Engine compartment

왘 Replace and tighten cap.

Warning! G More information on coolant can be found
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 345).
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above 1 Coolant expansion tank
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant 왘 Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under imately one half turn to the left to re-
pressure. lease any excess pressure.
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- 왘 Continue turning the cap to the left and
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres- remove it.
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un- The coolant level is correct if the level
der pressure. 앫 for cold coolant: is up to the upper
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine mark on the bracing rib of the coolant
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly- expansion tank (translucent)
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts. 앫 for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘 Add coolant as required.

231
Operation
Engine compartment

Battery If you do not intend to operate your vehicle

for an extended period of time, consult an E Wear eye protection.
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
ies:
앫 The starter battery (located in the en-
steps you need to observe.
C Keep children away.

gine compartment) G Observe all safety instructions

앫 The battery for electrical consumers

and precautions when han-
dling automotive batteries.
F Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
(located in the trunk)
These batteries should always be suffi- A Risk of explosion

ciently charged in order to achieve their Batteries contain materials that can harm
rated service life. D Keep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
If you use your vehicle mostly for short dis-
tance trips, you will need to have the bat-
tery charge checked more frequently.
B Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
with skin, eyes or clothing. for recycling.
When replacing batteries, always use bat-
teries approved by Mercedes-Benz. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.

232
 Operation
Engine compartment

Windshield washer system and The windshield washer system on this ve-
headlamp cleaning system hicle is heated, so that a fluid mixture pro-
duced for temperatures of approximately
Fluid for the windshield washer system and 14°F (–10°C) should be sufficient.
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 7.4 US qt. (7 l). Warning! G
During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Pre-mix mable. Do not spill washer
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
container. 1 Washer fluid reservoir
cause it may ignite. You could be seriously
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield burned. !
Washer Concentrate and water (or Only use washer fluid which is suitable
commercially available pre-mixed More information can be found in the for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, “Technical data” section (컄 page 347). id can damage the plastic lenses of the
depending on ambient temperatures). headlamps.
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/reser-
voir.

233
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Important guidelines
ter for information on tested and recom- Warning! G
mended rims and tires for summer and 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
winter operation. They can also offer ad- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
vice concerning tire service and purchase. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
Warning! G When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
Replace rims or tires with the same designa- speeds.
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and may lead to
original part. See your authorized an accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- damage.
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Retread tires are not tested or recom- 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
mounted: mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous pressure and correct as required.
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension compo- damage cannot always be recognized on
앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
nents can be damaged. retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
앫 The correct operating clearance of the roads are sharply reduced at tread
cle when such tires are used.
wheels and the tires is no longer guaran- depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
teed. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
ter for information on tested and recom-
should mount new tires on the front
mended rims and tires for summer and
wheels first (on vehicles with
winter operation.
same-sized wheels all around).

234
 Operation
Tires and wheels

Life of tires Direction of rotation If the tires are warm you should only cor-
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- rent operating conditions.
various factors including but not limited to: es, such as better aquaplaning perfor-
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
앫 Driving style ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
앫 Tire pressure cold tires as well as for various operating
specified.
conditions.
앫 Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
tended direction of rotation of the tire. i
Warning! G The pressures listed for light loads are
Checking tire inflation pressure minimum values offering high driving
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after comfort.
six years, independently of the remaining Increased inflation pressures listed for
tread. Warning! G heavier loads may also be used for light
If the tire pressure repeatedly drops
loads. These higher pressures produce
! favorable handling characteristics. The
앫 check the tires for punctures from for- ride of the vehicle, however, will be
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry eign objects
place with as little exposure to light as somewhat harder. Never exceed the
앫 check to see whether air is leaking from maximum values or inflate tires below
possible. Protect tires from contact
the valves or from around the rim the minimum values listed in the fuel
with oil, grease and gasoline.
filler flap.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.

235
Operation
Tires and wheels

Regularly check your tire pressure at inter- Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
vals of no more than 14 days. multifunction display (컄 page 110). The
present inflation pressures are displayed
Tire pressure changes by approximately
only after a few minutes travel time.
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind You can select the unit of measure used for
when checking tire pressure where the the tire inflation pressure by changing the
temperature is different from the outside setting in the control system (컄 page 129).
temperature.
i
The tire temperature and with it the tire
Possible differences between the read-
pressure is increased also while driving,
ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
depending on the driving speed and the
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and Warning! G
tire load.
the vehicle’s control system can occur.
The readings issued by the control sys- The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
Checking tire pressure electronically* indicate a warning for wrongly selected in-
tem are more precise.
The tire inflation pressure monitor only flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
functions on wheels that are equipped with pressure according to the label on the fuel
왘 Switch on ignition.
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors filler flap.
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by 왘 Press k button until the current in- The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is- flation pressures for each tire appear in able to issue a warning due to a sudden loss
sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure the tachometer display field. of pressure (e.g. tire puncture caused by a
in one or more of the tires. foreign object). In the event of a sudden loss
of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by
carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.

236
 Operation
Tires and wheels

Activating the tire inflation pressure i

Warning! G monitor If transporting a deflated road wheel or
You must activate the tire inflation pres- additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
Follow recommend tire pressures.
sure monitor in the following cases: the tire inflation pressure monitor
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires should not be reactivated until the de-
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- 앫 if you have changed the tire pressure
flated wheel or additional wheel sen-
cause they are more likely to become punc- 앫 if you have replaced the wheels or tires sors have been removed from the
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
앫 if you have installed new wheels or
etc. or additional sensors could confuse the
tires
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires tire inflation pressure monitor system
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling 왘 Be sure that the tire pressure is cor- and cause it to malfunction.
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail rectly set.
from being overheated. 왘 Press the k button until the infla- 왘 Press the reset knob (컄 page 21).
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the tion pressure of each tire appears in
The following message will appear in
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- the right display field.
the speedometer display field:
ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s Monitor current tire pressure?
door opening). Overloading the tires can
왘 Press æ button.
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
The following message will appear in
the speedometer display field:
i Tire pressure monitor activated!
Operating radio transmission equip- Pressure display after driving
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way several mins.
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire inflation pressure moni-
tor to malfunction.

237
Operation
Tires and wheels

If you wish to cancel activation: Rotating wheels Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
왘 Press ç button.
sure proper tire inflation pressure, activat-
If the following message appears in the Warning! G ing the tire inflation pressure monitor if
speedometer display field: necessary.
Reactivate tire press. monit. Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
왘 Re-start the activation of the tire infla- Warning! G
tion pressure monitor.
On vehicles with the same wheel size all Have the tightening torque checked after
If the following message appears in the
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000 changing a wheel. Wheels could become
speedometer display field:
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or loose if not tightened with a torque of
Tire pressure
sooner if necessary, according to the de- 96 ft.lb. (130 Nm).
Check tires!
gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
왘 Re-start the activation of the tire infla- rotation must be retained.
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
tion pressure monitor.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).

238
 Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter have your vehi- !
cle winterized at an authorized When scraping ice or snow from the Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in- rear window, be careful not to damage
cludes: Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in
the sealing strip or apertures along the
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze side of the window.
er suitable for winter operation.
concentration.
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the Winter tires
Always observe the speed rating of the
water of the windshield and headlamp winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Always use winter tires at temperatures
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate maximum speed for which your tires are
below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry
“S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
for below freezing temperatures where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
fectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter
(컄 page 346). tices are available from your tire dealer or
operation.
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
For safe handling, ensure that all winter ter.
with decreasing ambient temperature.
tires mounted are of the same make and
A well charged battery helps to ensure
have the same tread design.
that the engine can be started and the
SBC brake system will be fully opera-
tional even at low ambient tempera-
tures.
앫 Tire change. We recommend M+S rat-
ed radial-ply tires on all four wheels for
the winter season.

239
Operation
Winter driving

Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines

Warning! G when using snow chains:
When driving with snow chains, always se-
If you use your spare tire when winter tires 앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible
lect setting 1 of the level control system
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that with all wheel/tire combinations.
(컄 page 184). Other settings may result in
the difference in tire characteristics may damage to your vehicle. 앫 Chains should only be used on the rear
very well impair turning stability and that wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
Snow chains should only be driven on
overall driving stability may be reduced. mounting instructions.
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains 앫 Only use snow chains that are ap-
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter as soon as possible when driving on roads proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
tire at the nearest authorized without snow. rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
Mercedes-Benz Center. glad to advise you on this subject.
i
When driving with snow chains, you !
Block heater (Canada only)
may wish to deactivate the ESP Use of snow chains is not permissible
The engine is equipped with a block heat- (컄 page 71) before setting the vehicle with tire sizes 285 /35 R18.
er. in motion. This will improve the vehi-
cle‘s traction.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

240
 Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have The type of service due is indicated in the
your vehicle serviced by your authorized speedometer display field:
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
9 Minor service (A)
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System). ´ Major service (B)
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in i
accordance with the Service Booklet at the The interval between services depends
designated times/mileage called for by on your driving habits. A gentle driving
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not style, moderate engine speeds and the
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited avoidance of short distance trips will 1 Reset knob
Warranty. lengthen the interval between services.
왘 Press the reset knob 1.
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due. Clearing the service indicator
Service term exceeded
Approximately one month before your next
The service indicator is automatically
service is due, one of the following mes- If you have exceeded the suggested ser-
cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
sages will appear in the tachometer dis- vice term, you will see the following mes-
clear it yourself.
play field while you are driving or when you sage in the tachometer display field:
switch on the ignition (example service A):
Service A exceeded by xx days
Service A in xx days Service A exceeded by xx miles
Service A in xx miles (km) (km)
Service A Due now!
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.

241
Operation
Maintenance

Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator 왘 To confirm, hold down the reset knob
until you hear a signal.
왘 Switch ignition on. In the event that the service on your vehi-
The service indicator now displays the
cle is not carried out by an authorized
The standard display of the control sys- reset interval.
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
tem appears (컄 page 110).
service indicator yourself. i
왘 Press button k or j on the
왘 Switch ignition on. Only reset if the proper service has
steering wheel until the service symbol
9 or ´ appears in the speedom- The standard display of the control sys- been performed. Resetting the system
eter display and the service deadline in tem appears (컄 page 110). without performing proper service as
the tachometer. called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
왘 Press button k or j on the to incorrectly determine the next ser-
steering wheel until the service symbol vice interval which will result in engine
9 or ´ appears in the speedom- damage not covered by the Mer-
eter display and the service deadline in cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
the tachometer.
If the battery supplying the vehicle’s
왘 Press the reset knob for about four electrical consumers is disconnected,
seconds. the days of disconnection will not be in-
This message appears in the tachome- cluded in the count shown by the ser-
ter: vice indicator. To arrive at the true
service deadline, you will need to sub-
Do you want to reset the service tract these days from the days shown
interval? in the service indicator.
Confirm by using reset button
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator : .

242
 Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle To avoid paint damage, you should imme- You should check your vehicle from time to
diately remove: time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
앫 Grease and oil
Warning! G possible to prevent corrosion.
앫 Fuel
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
앫 Coolant of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Brake fluid ough check is a washing of the underbody
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Bird droppings aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
앫 Insects Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-
signed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Tree resins, etc. ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
While in operation, even while parked, your nates the aggressiveness and potency of
neither necessary nor recommended by
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- the above adverse influences.
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- More frequent washings are necessary to of incompatibility between materials used
tack the paintwork as well as the deal with unfavorable conditions: in the production process and others ap-
underbody and cause lasting damage. plied later.
앫 Near the ocean
Such damage is caused not only by ex- We have selected car-care products and
treme and varying climatic conditions, but 앫 In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions) compiled recommendations which are
also by: specially matched to our vehicles and
앫 Air pollution 앫 During winter operation which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
앫 Road salt
car-care products at your authorized
앫 Tar, gravel and stone chipping Mercedes-Benz Center.

243
Operation
Vehicle care

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or i Paintwork, painted body components

damage due to negligent or incorrect care Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
cannot always be removed or repaired with If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of should be applied when water drops on the
the car-care products recommended here. water, and a KEYLESS-GO* card is in paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your close proximity, i.e. within approx. 3 ft. every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be in- and washing detergent used.
The following topics deal with the cleaning advertently locked or unlocked.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
and care of your vehicle and give important
should be applied if the paint surface
“how-to” information as well as references ! shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod- Never use a round nozzle to power gloss).
ucts. wash tires. The intense jet of water can
Do not apply any of these products or wax
Additional information can be found in the result in damage to the tire.
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
“Vehicle Care Guide” booklet. Always replace a damaged tire. hood is still hot.
Power washer Always keep the jet of water moving Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
across the surface. Do not aim directly for quick and provisional repairs of minor
When using a power washer for cleaning at electrical parts, electrical connec- paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
the vehicle, always observe manufactur- tors, seals, or other rubber parts. cle doors, etc.).
er’s operating instructions.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.

244
 Operation
Vehicle care

Engine cleaning Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry Ornamental moldings
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
agents to dry on the finish.
make sure to protect electrical compo- chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
nents and connectors from the intrusion of Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in out- er.
water and cleaning agents. side mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
damage to the mirrors. lenses
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en-
gine compartment after every engine In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
cleaning. Before applying, all control link- of road salt as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
age bushings and joints should be lubricat- When washing the underbody, do not for- with plenty of water.
ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should get to clean the inner sides of the wheels. To prevent scratches, never apply strong
be protected from any wax. force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
i cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
Vehicle washing Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of or sponge.
in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash water, and a KEYLESS-GO* card is in
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- close proximity, i.e. within approx 3 ft.
proved Car Shampoo. (approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be in-
advertently locked or unlocked.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.

245
Operation
Vehicle care

Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor i To prevent scratches, never apply strong
cover Restart the engine after cleaning the force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
sensor 1. cloth when cleaning the sensors. Do not
attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
Wiper blades

Distronic* system sensor cover

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water to clean the sensor
cover 1. 1 Parktronic* sensors
Position of wiper blades when cleaning
To prevent scratches, never apply strong Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
force and only use a soft, non-scratchy !
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at- with plenty of water. To prevent damage to the hood or the
tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth wipers, the wiper arms MUST BE folded
When using a steam cleaner or power forward in the position shown above.
or sponge.
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) at
왘 Turn key in the starter switch to
sensors 1.
position 1.

246
 Operation
Vehicle care

왘 Turn combination switch to position 1 Window cleaning Light alloy wheels

(컄 page 44).
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
왘 Once the wiper arms are in the position surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is should be used for regular cleaning of the
shown above, turn key in starter switch recommended. light alloy wheels.
to position 0.
i If possible, clean wheels once a week with
i Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
For safety reasons, remove key from and remove key from starter switch be-
of water.
starter switch before cleaning the wip- fore cleaning the windshield, otherwise
er blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor the wiper motor can suddenly turn on Follow instructions on container.
can suddenly turn on and cause injury. and cause injury.
i
왘 Turn combination switch to position 0 Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
(컄 page 44). The acid could lead to corrosion.

왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a

Instrument cluster
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
! mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
Fold the windshield wiper arms back washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
onto the windshield before turning the ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
key in the starter switch. scouring agents.

247
Operation
Vehicle care

Steering wheel and gear selector lever Seat belts Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly The webbing must not be treated with
become wet.
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
Leather Care. lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
Plastic and rubber parts
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
Cup holder (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Warning! G
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
scouring agents. severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Leather upholstery
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
with light pressure. clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
Headliner and shelf below rear window the upholstery to become permanently dis-
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a colored. By lining the seats with a proper
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
dirt. will be prevented.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

248
 Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses

249
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

v The yellow ABS/ESP warning ESP is deactivated. 왘 Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 72).
lamp lights up while driving. Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be turned back on,
have the system checked at an autho-
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
ing road conditions.
as possible.
v The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ESP, ABS or traction control has come 왘 During take-off apply as little throttle
lamp flashes while driving. into operation because of detected traction as possible.
loss in at least one tire. Distronic* is deacti- 왘 While driving ease up on the accelera-
vated. tor.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP (excep-
tions: (컄 page 71)).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.

250
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS malfunction indi- The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
cator lamp comes on while driv- switched off. The BAS and ESP are also Wheels may lock during hard braking,
ing. switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability.
The SBC brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
mally but without ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth- as possible.
er systems such as Parktronic*, Distronic*, Failure to follow these instructions in-
or the automatic transmission may also be creases the risk of an accident.
malfunctioning.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
display (컄 page 257).
E The red DTR indicator lamp lights You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to in-
up while driving. to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
E The red DTR indicator lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you ahead of you. 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
hear a warning sound. 앫 The distance warning system has recog- You may need to brake or maneuver
nized a stationary obstacle on your prob- to avoid hitting an obstacle.
able line of travel.
E The white DTR indicator lamp The Distronic* distance sensor has recog-
lights up while driving. nized a vehicle in front of you.

251
Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

1 The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
up while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized
device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or Mercedes-Benz Center.
fail to activate in an accident.

Warning! G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately to have the system checked; otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in an accident and/or
injury to you or to others.

252
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

3 (Canada only)
; except Canada)
The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking brake set, 왘 Release the parking brake
lights up while driving and you (컄 page 41).
or
hear a warning sound.
there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system. 왘 Read and observe messages in the
display (컄 page 257).
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir. 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
lights up while driving vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re- !

Warning! G sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine If you find that the brake fluid in the
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
can be seriously burned. minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake sys-
tem.

253
Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

D The red coolant warning lamp There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
lights up when the engine is run- engine from overheating
ning. (컄 page 230).
If this warning lamp lights up frequently, 왘 Have the cooling system checked.
there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
diator fan may be broken. 257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
D The red coolant warning lamp The coolant temperature has exceeded 왘 Stop as soon as possible and allow
lights up while driving and you 257°F (125°C). the engine and coolant to cool down.
hear a warning sound.

catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
Warning! G and do not stand near the vehicle until it
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
Driving when your engine is badly overheat- serious burns and can occur just by opening cools down.
ed can cause some fluids which may have the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
leaked into the engine compartment to if you see or hear steam coming from it.

254
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

C The yellow roll bar warning lamp The roll bar is not operational. 왘 For safety reasons, always have the
lights up or flickers when the en- roll bar raised when driving with the
gine is running. retractable hardtop open. Attempt to
raise the roll bar manually.
왘 Have the roll bar checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp lights while driv- mark. (컄 page 225).
ing.
The fuel cap is not closed tight. 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 225).

Warning! G
If the roll bar warning lamp does not light up,
does not go out after a long time, flickers or
lights up while driving as described above,
then the roll bar system is not operating
properly and may not activate in an acci-
dent. In this case, raise the roll bar manually
(컄 page 61) before continuing to drive.

255
Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

? The yellow CHECK ENGINE mal- There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
function indicator lamp comes possible by an authorized
앫 The fuel injection system
on while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The emission control system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
앫 Systems which effect emissions tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
Such malfunctions may result in excessive tion of system malfunctions through
emissions values and may switch the engine the readout of diagnostic trouble
to its limp-home (emergency operation) codes. It is located in the front left
mode. area of the footwell next to the park-
ing brake.

The fuel cap is not closed tightly. 왘 Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You
do not need to have your vehicle
checked.
< The red seat belt warning lamp The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
lights up after starting the en- belts.
gine.

256
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Messages in the display i

Warning! G Turning the key in starter switch to
The control system shows warning and
position 2, or pressing the KEY-
malfunction messages in the multifunction All messages contain important information
LESS-GO* start/stop button (if so
display. which should be taken note of and, where a
equipped) twice to position 2 causes
malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon
Certain warning and malfunction messag- all lamps as well as the multifunction
as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
es are accompanied by an audible signal. display to come on. Ensure that they
Center.
Address these messages accordingly and are all in working order before starting
Failure to repair condition noted may cause your journey.
follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
this Operator’s Manual. Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
On the pages that follow, you will find a
High priority messages appear in the mul- age or personal injury.
compilation of all the messages that may
tifunction display in red color. appear in the display. High priority mes-
Certain messages of high priority cannot Selecting the malfunction memory menu in sages appear on a red background.
be cleared from the multifunction display the control system (컄 page 118) displays
using the reset knob (컄 page 21) or a both cleared and uncleared messages.
steering wheel button.
Other high priority messages and messag- Warning! G
es of less immediate priority (regular dis-
play colors) can be cleared from the No messages will be displayed if either the
multifunction display using the reset knob instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
or one of the steering wheel buttons. play is inoperative.
These are then stored in the malfunction Contact your nearest authorized
message memory (컄 page 118). Mercedes-Benz Center.

257
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

ABC Drive carefully! The capability of the ABC system is re- 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
stricted. This can impair handling. (80 km/h).
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
The vehicle is losing oil. 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Stop, car too low The car is parked on an extremely un- 왘 Press the vehicle level control button to se-
even surface. lect level 2 (컄 page 184).
ABC is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop and press the ABC button to select a
higher vehicle level (컄 page 183).
왘 Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
damaging the front fenders.
왘 Listen for scraping noises.
왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.

258
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

ABC Visit workshop! The capability of the ABC system is re- 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
stricted.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Display defective The ABC display or the ABC system it- 왘 Visit an authorized
Visit workshop! self is malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ABS Defective! The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! and has switched off. The ESP and
왘 Visit an authorized
BAS are also deactivated. The SBC
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without ABS available. Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.
Display defective ABS or the ABS display is malfunction- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! ing.
왘 Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.

259
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

BAS Defective! The BAS has detected a malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! tion and switched off. The ESP
왘 Visit an authorized
and ABS are also deactivated.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The SBC brake system is still
functioning normally but without Failure to follow these instructions increases the
ABS available. risk of accident.
Display defective BAS or the BAS display is mal- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! functioning.
왘 Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.

260
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

ESP Defective! The ESP is deactivated because of 왘 With the vehicle stationary, turn the steering
Visit workshop! a malfunction or an interrupted wheel completely to the left and then to the
power supply. The SBC brake sys- right to synchronize the ESP.
tem is still functioning normally.
If the ESP message does not go out:
The ABS may still be operational.
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.
Display defective ESP or the ESP display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! tioning.
왘 Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.

261
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

Distronic External fault Distronic* is switched off and is 왘 Try activating Distronic* again later.
Reactivate! temporarily unavailable.
Clear sensor! Distronic* is switched off be- 왘 Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille
See Owner’s Man. cause the Distronic* cover in the (컄 page 246).
radiator grille is dirty.
왘 Restart the vehicle.
Visit workshop! Distronic* is malfunctioning or 왘 Visit an authorized
the display is malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
P Selector lever You have turned off the engine 왘 Place the selector lever in position P.
to P! with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button* and opened
the driver’s door.
Cruise Visit workshop! Cruise control or Distronic* is 왘 Have the cruise control or Distronic* checked
Control malfunctioning. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

262
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

G Display defective The instrument cluster display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
malfunctioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
L Visit workshop! One or more main functions of the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au-
Tele Aid system are malfunctioning. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
# Battery/Alternator The battery is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Stop vehicle! Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced
The SBC brake system requires elec-
braking responsiveness.
trical energy and therefore has only
limited operation. Considerably 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
greater brake pedal force is required
and the stopping distance is in-
creased.

263
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

# Electric consumers The consumer battery has insuffi- The electrical consumers will come back online
offline! cient voltage and can no longer sup- as soon as on-board voltage is sufficient.
ply the convenience functions such
as seat ventilation*.
Battery/Alternator The battery was charged with a bat- 왘 Have the battery checked at a service sta-
Stop vehicle! tery charger or jump started. tion.
The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.
Possible causes
If it is broken
앫 alternator malfunctioning 왘 Do not continue to drive. Notify an autho-
앫 broken poly-V-belt rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not forget that the brake system If it is in order
requires electrical energy and may
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest autho-
be operating with restricted capabil-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driv-
ity. Considerably greater brake ped-
ing to be consistent with reduced braking
al force is required and the stopping
responsiveness.
distance is increased.

264
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

2 Brake lining wear! The brake pads have reached their 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
Visit workshop! wear limit. possible.
T Brake defective! The SBC brake system is in emer- 왘 Do not drive any further.
Stop vehicle! gency operation mode. Consider-
왘 Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized
ably greater brake pedal force is
Mercedes-Benz Center.
required and the stopping distance
is increased. 왘 Significantly greater force must be applied
to the brake pedal.
The maximum speed is limited to
55 mph (90 km/h). 왘 Call for roadside assistance.
Reduced The battery has insufficient voltage 왘 Start the engine.
brake effect and cannot supply sufficient power
As soon as the engine is running, the mes-
Start engine! to the SBC brake system.
sage disappears.

!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service book-
let.

265
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

Except Canada: Reduced The SBC brake system is in emer- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
; brake effect gency operation mode. Consider-
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Canada only: Visit workshop! able brake pedal force is required
immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
3 Incr.
and the stopping distance is in-
with reduced braking responsiveness.
creased.
braking dist.
Visit workshop!
Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and notify
below min. level! reservoir. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do
Visit workshop! not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.

!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.

266
 Practical hints
What to do if …

If the SBC brake system enters its emergen- Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause
Warning! G cy operation mode, the driver must apply the braking system to fail!
Driving while these messages are displayed significantly greater brake pedal pressure If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
can result in an accident. Have your brake and depress the pedal much further than pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front
system checked immediately. normal to obtain braking effect. wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause
system, we recommend that the vehicle be pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front the braking system to fail!
transported with all wheels off the ground wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir- ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
cumstances do not permit the use of the engine parts and the brake fluid catching
recommended towing methods and the ve- fire. You can be seriously burned.
hicle requires towing with all four wheels on
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground is only permissible for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For
more information, refer to "Towing the
vehicle"(컄 page 325).

267
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

Except Canada: Service brake There are malfunctions, but the SBC 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
; Visit workshop! brake system is operating normally. soon as possible.
Canada only: Incr. The battery has insufficient voltage 왘 Start the engine.
3 braking distance and cannot supply sufficient power
The message disappears when sufficient
Start engine! to the SBC brake system.
voltage is available.
Brakes overheated! The brake system is overheated due 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
Drive carefully! to an excessive load on the brakes.
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to
avoid unnecessary braking.
왘 When driving down steep grades, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power
(컄 page 139).
왘 Cautiously continue driving so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes.

268
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

F Chip card The KEYLESS-GO* card batteries are 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 294).
Check battery! discharged.
Chip card The KEYLESS-GO* card is not recog- 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
not recognised! nized while the engine is running be- so.
cause
왘 Search for the card or continue to operate
앫 the card is not in the vehicle the vehicle with the key.
앫 there is strong radio-frequency Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
interference locked nor can the engine be started again
after the engine is stopped.
The KEYLESS-GO* card is momen- 왘 Change the position of the card in the vehi-
tarily not recognized. cle.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the key if neces-
sary.
Chip card A KEYLESS-GO* card left in the vehi- 왘 Take the card out of the vehicle.
still in vehicle! cle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO* system is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Visit workshop! functioning. as soon as possible.

269
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

F Chip card! This display appears (for a maximum 왘 Insert key in the starter switch.
Do not forget! of 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is
왘 Take the KEYLESS-GO* card with you when
opened with the engine shut off and
leaving the vehicle.
no key in the starter switch.
Message is only a reminder.
ì Function This display appears if button ì
not available! or í on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel is pressed and the vehicle
is not equipped with a telephone.

270
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

F KEYLESS GO The KEYLESS-GO* system is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
Check system functioning. soon as possible.
Key This display appears (for a maximum 왘 Insert key in the starter switch.
Do not forget of 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is
왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with
opened with the engine shut off and
you when leaving the vehicle.
no key in the starter switch.
Message is only a reminder.
_ Entry position Seat, mirrors and steering wheel 왘 Wait until the seat, mirrors and steering
Do not drive! have not yet moved into their preset wheel have moved to their driving positions.
driving positions. The message disappears.
Except Canada: Release You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 41).
; parking brake! brake set.
Canada only:
!

271
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

< Seat belt system The seat belt system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Visit workshop! ing. as soon as possible.
Ê Close This message will appear whenever 왘 Close the trunk lid.
trunk lid! the trunk lid is open.
Close You are trying to open or close the 왘 Pull out the luggage cover and secure it
trunk separator! roof even though the luggage cover (컄 page 160).
in the trunk is not pulled out.
B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 230).
Check level!
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have
the cooling system checked by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not drive without sufficient amount

Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant of coolant in the cooling system. The
level warning. Extended driving with engine will overheat, causing major en-
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
this message and symbol displayed gine damage.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.

272
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

Ï Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle.
Stop, engine off!
왘 Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
왘 Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘 If it is broken, do not drive any further.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
If it is in order, drive immediately to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.

catch fire. You could be seriously burned. and do not stand near the vehicle until it
Warning! G Steam from an overheated engine can cause cools down. The engine should not be oper-
Driving when your engine is badly overheat- serious burns and can occur just by opening ated with the coolant temperature above
ed can cause some fluids which may have the engine hood. Stay away from the engine 266°F (130°C). Doing so may cause serious
leaked into the engine compartment to if you see or hear steam coming from it. engine damage which is not covered by the
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

273
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

Ï Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge.
Visit workshop! malfunctioning.
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
. Low beam, The left low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
left tioning. as soon as possible.
Low beam, The right low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
right tioning. as soon as possible.
Display defective The display for the lights is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Visit workshop! tioning. as soon as possible.
Turn signal R, L The left rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute functioning. A backup bulb has been
lamp on! brought into use.
Turn signal R, R The right rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute malfunctioning. A backup bulb has
lamp on! been brought into use.

274
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

. L. turn sig. rflectr The left turn signal in the side mirror 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if all light emitting di-
odes have stopped working.
R. turn sig. rflectr The right turn signal in the side mir- 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
ror is malfunctioning. This message
will only appear if all light emitting
diodes have stopped working.
Turn signal F, L The left front turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute functioning. A backup bulb has been
lamp on! brought into use.
Turn signal F, R The right front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute malfunctioning. A backup bulb has
lamp on! been brought into use.
Brake light! Brake lamp illumination is delayed or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
Visit workshop! lamp is permanently on. soon as possible.

275
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

. Brake lamp, L The left brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Substitute ing. A backup bulb has been brought as soon as possible.
lamp on! into use.
Brake lamp, R The right brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Substitute ing. A backup bulb has been brought as soon as possible.
lamp on! into use.
3rd brake light The high mounted brake lamp is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
functioning. as soon as possible.
High beam, left The left high beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
High beam, right The right high beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Fr. left The front left side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
marker lamp malfunctioning.
Fr. rt marker lamp The front right side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.
Re. left The rear left side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
marker lamp malfunctioning.
Re. rt marker lamp The rear right side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.

276
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

. Licence plate The left licence plate lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
lamp, L functioning.
Licence plate The right licence plate lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
lamp, R functioning.
Front foglamp, L The left front fog lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Front foglamp, R The right front fog lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Rear foglight, L The left rear fog lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
Rear foglight, R The right rear fog lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Reverse lamp, L The left backup lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
Reverse lamp, R The right backup lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.

277
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

. Tail lamp, L The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Substitute backup bulb has been brought into as soon as possible.
lamp on! use.
Tail lamp, R The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Substitute A backup bulb has been brought into as soon as possible.
lamp on! use.
Fr. left parkg lamp The left front parking lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute functioning. A backup bulb has been
lamp on! brought into use.
Fr. right parkg lamp The right front parking lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute functioning. A backup bulb has been
lamp on! brought into use.

278
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

. Light sensor The light sensor is malfunctioning. 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to
Visit workshop! The headlamps switch on automati- manual (컄 page 124).
cally.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp
switch.
? Visit workshop! There may be a malfunction in the 왘 Have the engine checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
앫 fuel injection system
(컄 page 256).
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
O Close hood! You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 228).
: Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. There is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon
Stop, engine off! a danger of engine damage. as possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil.

279
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

: Engine oil level The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 228) and
Check level! add oil as required.
Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned. Observe all legal require-
Reduce oil level! There is a risk of damaging the en- ments with respect to its disposal.
gine or the catalytic converter.
Engine oil The engine oil has dropped to a crit- 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 228) and
Visit workshop! ical level. add oil as required.
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
왘 Have the oil checked.
There is water in the oil.
Engine oil level The measuring system is malfunc- 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an
Visit workshop! tioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

280
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure One or more tires is rapidly deflat- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution ing. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
tire defect!
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
Tire pressure The tire pressure in one or more 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
ChecK tires! tires is already below the minimum abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
value.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
The tire pressure in one or more 왘 Check and correct tire pressure as required
tires is low. (컄 page 236).

Continued driving with a flat tire will cause

Warning! G excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.

281
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

Tire pressure Pressure display after The tire pressure is being checked.
control activated! driving several mins.
H Reactivate The tire inflation pressure monitor* is de- 왘 Activate the tire inflation pressure
tire press. monit. activated. monitor* (컄 page 237).
Tire press. monit. The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- 왘 Check the tire pressure at the next
currently inactive able to monitor the tire pressure due to: service station.
앫 the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle
앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures
앫 a nearby radio interference source
앫 unrecognized wheel sensors mounted

You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-

Warning! G ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

282
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire press. monit. The tire inflation pressure monitor is 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monitor
Visit workshop! malfunctioning. checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
A wheel without proper sensor was
installed. 왘 Change the wheel.
Tire pressure, RL The left rear tire is rapidly deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
tire defect!
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
Tire pressure, RL The left rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
왘 Check the tire pressure.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).

Continued driving with a flat tire will cause

Warning! G excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.

283
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure, RR The right rear tire is rapidly deflat- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution ing. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
tire defect!
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
Tire pressure, RR The right rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
왘 Check the tire pressure.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
Tire pressure, FL The left front tire is rapidly deflat- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution ing. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
tire defect!
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).

the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You

Warning! G may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.

284
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure, FL The left front tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
왘 Check the tire pressure.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
Tire pressure, FR The right front tire is rapidly deflat- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution ing. abrubt steering and braking maneuvers.
tire defect!
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).
Tire pressure, FR The right front tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 312).

the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You

Warning! G may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.

285
Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

I Remove key! You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the key from the starter switch.
key.
Replace key The batteries in the key are dead. 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 293).
Automat. light on 왘 Remove the key from the starter switch.
Remove key!
A Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 225).
the reserve mark.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 225).
J Door open! You are attempting to drive with 왘 Close the doors.
one or more doors open.
C Raise The roll bar is malfunctioning. 왘 Raise the roll bar using the roll bar switch
roll-over bar (컄 page 61).
왘 Have the roll bar checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Display defective The displays for several systems 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an au-
Visit workshop! have malfunctioned. Some sys- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tems themselves may also have
malfunctioned.

286
 Practical hints
What to do if …

Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution

K Visit workshop! The retractable hardtop is mal- 왘 Have the retractable hardtop checked by an au-
functioning. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Lock The roof is not properly locked. 왘 Push or pull on the retractable hardtop switch
hardtop until the indicator lamp in the switch goes out
and the roof is completely open or closed
(컄 page 159).
± Display defective Certain electronic systems are un- 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an au-
Visit workshop! able to relay information to the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center (컄 page 256).
control system. The following sys-
tems may have failed:
앫 Coolant temperature gauge
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 233).
Check level! about 1/3 of total reservoir ca-
pacity.

287
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit The jack is exclusively designed for lifting
the vehicle during a wheel change. Always
The first aid kit is located in storage space The vehicle tool kit is stored in the space lower the vehicle on sufficient capacity
under the passenger seat. underneath the trunk floor. jack stands before working under the vehi-
왘 Lift up the trunk floor cover. cle.

You can now remove the tools and ac-

cessories.
The vehicle tool kit includes
앫 One pair of universal pliers
앫 Two open-end wrenches
앫 One hex-socket wrench
1 Handle 앫 One interchangeable slot/Phillips
2 Lid screwdriver
왘 Pull the handle 1 up. 앫 One towing eye bolt
왘 Fold the lid 2 down. 앫 One wheel wrench
You can now remove the first-aid kit. 앫 One alignment bolt
앫 One fuse extractor
i
Check expiration dates and contents 앫 One fuse chart for the main fuse
for completeness at least once a year box
and replace missing/expired items. 앫 Spare fuses

288
 Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

Vehicles with spare wheel Vehicles with TIREFIT kit

1 Spare wheel 5 Jack (under spare wheel) 1 TIREFIT kit

2 Electric air pump 6 Wheel wrench (under spare wheel) 2 Electric air pump
3 Vehicle tool kit 3 Vehicle tool kit
4 Battery for electrical consumers 4 Battery for electrical consumers
5 Wheel wrench
6 Jack

289
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle 왘 Move locking tab 1 direction of arrow i
and slide the mechanical key out of the Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
housing. chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
Unlocking the driver’s door
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
one of the following:
door using the key, open the door using
the mechanical key. 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
key.
앫 Insert the key in the starter switch.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 30).

3 Unlocking
4 Locking
왘 Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
1 Mechanical key locking tab
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
2 Mechanical key
the left.

290
 Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency

Unlocking the trunk Unlocking interior storage compart-

ments
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the key, open the trunk with the mechani- Locking storage areas in the passenger
cal key as follows: compartment include:
앫 the glove box
앫 the storage space under the armrest
앫 the rear storage compartments
If these cannot be unlocked by means of
the key, the KEYLESS-GO* card or the cen- 1 Separately unlock storage compart-
tral locking button, use the mechanical key ments
to open the glove box. 2 Centrally lock/unlock storage com-
partments
i 3 Separately lock storage compartments
Trunk lid lock
The storage space under the armrest
1 Unlocking 왘 Slide mechanical key out of key hous-
and the rear storage compartments
ing (컄 page 290).
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the can only be unlocked using the me-
trunk lid lock. chanical key at the glove box lock. 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
glove box lock and turn it to position 2.
왘 Perform the following two steps simul-
taneously: All storage compartments are now un-
locked.
왘 Turn the key counterclockwise to
position 1.
왘 Pull the trunk lid handle and lift lid.

291
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency

Locking the vehicle Lowering the Easy Pack feature 왘 Using the hex-socket wrench provided
manually in the vehicle tool kit, carefully turn the
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with locking screw 2 approximately one
the electronic key, lock it with the mechan- If the Easy Pack feature does not fully low- quarter turn.
ical key as follows: er the retractable hardtop into the trunk
왘 Hook luggage cover into holders
compartment and you are unable to close
왘 Close the passenger door and the (컄 page 160).
the trunk lid, follow the instructions below.
trunk.
왘 Let go of the hardtop.
왘 Press the central locking switch in the
It should gradually lower into the trunk.
cockpit (컄 page 91).
왘 When top is completely lowered, return
왘 Check to see whether the locking knob
locking screw 2 to its original position.
on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary push it down manually. !
왘 Lock the driver’s door with the me- Do not overtighten the screw.
chanical key.
왘 Lock the trunk if necessary with the 왘 Close the lid.
mechanical key (컄 page 83). 1 Hex-socket wrench 왘 Replace the trunk floor.
2 Locking screw
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
왘 Remove the trunk floor from the trunk. Center as soon as possible.
왘 Lift up the lid located at the lower left
side of the trunk.
왘 Have a second person lift and hold the
retracted hardtop.

292
 Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency

Changing batteries i 왘 Insert the mechanical key in side open-

When changing batteries, always re- ing and push gray slide in direction of
If the batteries in the key or the KEY- arrow 2.
place both batteries. The required re-
LESS-GO* card are discharged, the vehicle
placement batteries are available at The battery compartment is unlatched.
can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is
any Mercedes-Benz Center.
recommended to have the batteries re- 왘 Pull the battery compartment out of the
placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz key housing in direction of arrow 3.
Center. Key
왘 Remove the batteries.

Warning! G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.

Batteries contain materials that can harm

the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred 1 Mechanical key
2 Unlatching battery compartment 5 Battery
method of disposal. Many states require
3 Pulling out battery compartment 6 Contact spring
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling. 4 Mechanical key locking tab 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type teries under the contact spring with the
CR 2025 or equivalent. plus (+) side facing up.

왘 Remove the mechanical key 1 왘 Return battery compartment into hous-

(컄 page 290). ing until locked in place.

293
Practical hints
Locking/unlocking in an emergency

KEYLESS-GO card*

1 Battery cover
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘 Pry open the cover 1.
왘 Remove the batteries.
왘 Install new batteries as indicated by
the “+” and “-” markings in the KEY-
LESS-GO card.
왘 Replace battery cover 1.

294
 Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs i i
If the headlamps are fogged up on the Backup bulbs will be brought into use
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
inside as a result of high humidity, driv- when the following lamps malfunction:
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
ing the vehicle a distance should clear 앫 Turn signal lamps
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
up the fogging.
semblies are in good working order at all 앫 Brake lamps
times.
앫 Parking lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and 앫 Tail lamps
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment

295
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Front lamps Rear lamps

Lamp Type Lamp Type

1 Additional turn LED 7 Rear fog lamp, P 21 W
signal driver’s side;
2 Turn signal lamp 1156 A replacement 1156/32 cp

3 Low beam1 Xenon D2S-35 W 8 High mounted LED

brake lamp
4 High beam H7 (55 W)
9 Backup lamp; P 21 W
Parking and W5W replacement 1156/32 cp
standing lamps
10 Tail, parking and LED
5 Fog lamp HB4/9006 (55 W) standing lamp,
6 Side marker W5W side marker
lamp 11 Tail, parking and LED
1
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam standing lamp,
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do brake lamp
not replace the Xenon and Bi-Xenon* bulbs your-
self. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 12 License plate C5W
lamps
13 Turn signal P 21 W
lamp;
replacement 1156/32 cp

296
 Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Warning! G 앫 Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- and with the specified watt rating.
앫 the additional turn signals in the exteri-
low the lamp to cool down before changing 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
or rear view mirrors
a bulb. to prevent short circuits.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when 앫 the high mounted brake lamp
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A handling bulbs. 앫 the brake lamps
bulb can explode if you: 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 the parking lamps and the side marker
앫 touch or move it when hot, and grease. lamps in the tail lamp assemblies
앫 drop the bulb, 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not light 앫 the rear fog lamps
앫 scratch the bulb. up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 the low beam (Xenon or Bi-Xenon*)
Center. lamps
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is 앫 the front fog lamps
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.

297
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for front lamps Replacing front turn signal bulb Replacing high beam bulbs
왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 227).
왘 Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push and
twist clockwise.
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist 1 High beam bulbs
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 왘
clockwise. 2 Locking mechanism
2 Low beam lamp cover (Xenon or
3 Parking and standing lamps
Bi-Xenon* lamp). Do not remove.
3 High beam lamp cover 왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 227).
Warning! G 왘 Press ends of headlamp cover tab to-
gether and remove cover.
Do not remove the cover for the Xenon or
Bi-Xenon*headlamp. Because of high volt- 왘 Pull electrical connector off.
age in Xenon and Bi-Xenon* lamps, it is dan- 왘 Turn the locking mechanism 2 counter-
gerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp clockwise and take out the bulb.
and its components. We recommend that
you have such work done by a qualified 왘 Insert the new bulb so that the base lo-
technician. cates in the recess on the holder.

298
 Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

왘 Turn the locking mechanism 2 clock- Replacing side marker lamp Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
wise.
왘 Plug the connector onto the bulb. Tail lamp assemblies
왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
place.

Replacing parking and standing lamp

bulbs
왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 227). 왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Press ends of headlamp cover tab to- 왘 Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
gether and remove cover.
왘 Remove front end first. 1 Backup lamp
왘 Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb. 2 Turn signal lamp
왘 Twist bulb socket counterclockwise 3 Driver’s side: Rear fog lamp
왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket. and pull out. Passenger’s side: Substitute lamp
왘 Insert a new bulb in the socket. 왘 Pull bulb out of the bulb socket. 왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Reinstall the bulb socket. 왘 Insert new bulb in socket. 왘 Open the trunk lid (컄 page 83).
왘 Align headlamp cover and click into 왘 Reinstall bulb socket, push in, and twist
place. 왘 Fold trim to side and remove.
clockwise.
왘 Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
i 왘 To reinstall lamp, set rear end in and pull out. 컄컄
Have the headlamp adjustment bumper and let front end snap into
checked regularly. place.

299
 Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

컄컄 왘 Gently push bulb into socket, turn License plate lamp

counterclockwise and remove.
왘 Insert new bulb and reinstall bulb sock-
et.
The bulb socket should audibly click
into place.
왘 Reinstall trim.

1 Screws
왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Loosen both screws and remove lamp.
왘 Replace the bulb and reinstall lamp.
왘 Retighten the screws.

300
 Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
! Installing
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper Warning! G
arms should only be folded forward 왘 Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm.
For safety reasons, remove key from starter
when in the vertical position. 왘 Rotate wiper blade into position paral-
switch before replacing a wiper blade, other-
lel to wiper arm.
wise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury. 왘 Fold wiper arm back so that blade rests
on windshield.
왘 Fold wiper arm forward. !
You should hear it snap into place. Never open the hood when the wiper
왘 Turn wiper blade at a right angle to the arm is folded forward.
wiper arm. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
For your convenience, we recommend
Removing that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 1.
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
setting 2 (컄 page 44).
왘 With wiper arm in the vertical position
(see above), turn key in starter switch 왘 Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
to position 0. the retainer.

301
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 1 The TIREFIT kit stored in the trunk contains
(SL 55 AMG only) or a spare wheel the TIREFIT container, a filler hose, a valve
(SL 500 only). stem tool, a valve, and a sticker.
You can identify which TIREFIT kit
Warning! G
(SL 55 AMG only) you have as follows:
Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame Warning! G
앫 The TIREFIT container of kit 1 is a or heat source.
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
squeeze container. Do not smoke. cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
앫 The TIREFIT container of kit 2 is a rigid than approx. 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire dam-
container. Small tire punctures, particularly those in age caused by driving with extremely low
the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. tire pressure, or on a flat tire, or a damaged
Preparing the vehicle TIREFIT can be used in ambient tempera- wheel.
tures down to -4°F (-20°C). Do not drive the vehicle under such circum-
왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from
stances.
moving traffic on a hard surface.
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz Cen-
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
ter for assistance or call Roadside
왘 Engage the steering wheel lock in the Assistance.
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘 Move the selector lever to P.
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.

302
 Practical hints
Flat tire

왘 Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) 왘 Shake contents of TIREFIT container 1.

should not be removed from the tire.
왘 Screw hose 1 on to TIREFIT container
Warning! G
왘 Attach the sticker where it will be easily 2. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
seen by the driver on the instrument
TIREFIT is now ready for use. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
cluster. plenty of water and drink plenty of water.

Warning! G Do not induce vomiting!

Consult a physician immediately.
Take care not to allow the contents of
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed or absorbed through the skin - causes
skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
1 Filler hose If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
2 TIREFIT container change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.

303
Practical hints
Flat tire

왘 Remove tire valve core 6 from valve i

stem 1 using valve stem tool 2. Keep If the removed tire valve core is dirty,
tire valve 6 clean and dry. use the spare tire valve core stored
왘 Remove plug 5 from end of hose 4. with the valve stem tool.
왘 Push hose 4 onto valve stem 1.
왘 Reinstall valve cap on valve stem 1.
왘 Hold TIREFIT container 3 upside down
(hose down) and squeeze firmly several 왘 Install plug 5 onto end of hose 4.
times until entire contents of the con-
i
tainer are in tire.
1 Valve stem If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
2 Valve stem tool 왘 Pull hose 4 off and screw tire valve 6 can then peel it off.
3 TIREFIT container tightly into the valve stem 1 using the
4 Filler hose valve stem tool 2.
5 Filler hose plug
6 Tire valve core
왘 Unscrew the valve cap from valve 1.

304
 Practical hints
Flat tire

왘 Drive the vehicle back and forth very 왘 Turn the key in the ignition to position
slowly approximately 30 ft (10 m). 1 (컄 page 29).
This distributes the TIREFIT sealant ma- or
terial inside the tire.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the button on the selector lever once. Do
trunk. not depress brake pedal.
왘 Press I on the electric air pump switch.
Warning! G The electric air pump should now
1 Flap switch on and inflate the tire.
Observe safety instructions on air pump la-
bel. 2 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must
screw display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air
3 Union nut hose and the union nut can become hot
4 Electrical plug during inflation. Please exercise appropri-
왘 Open flap 1 on air pump. ate caution.

왘 Pull out electrical plug 4 and air hose 왘 If this tire pressure is not attained, turn
with the pressure gauge 2. off the electric air pump, detach the air
hose from the tire valve, and again
왘 Screw the air hose 2 onto the tire valve. drive vehicle back and forth very slowly
왘 Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle ci- approximately 30 ft (10 m).
gar lighter socket. This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.
왘 Inflate the tire again.

305
Practical hints
Flat tire

!
Do not operate the electric air pump Warning! G Warning! G
longer than eight minutes without in-
If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not at- Do not exceed vehicle speed of
terruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
tained, tire is too severely damaged for 50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
You may operate the air pump again af- TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair. designed to operate at higher speeds.
ter it has cooled off. In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal The sticker must be attached on the instru-
the tire. ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
왘 Press 0 on the electric air pump switch. the driver.
Do not drive the vehicle.
왘 Turn the key in the ignition to Vehicle handling characteristics may
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
position 0. change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
or call Roadside Assistance.
or
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 왘 Detach the electric air pump. 왘 After driving vehicle for an initial
on the selector lever twice. Do not de- 10 minutes, check tire pressure using
The air hose may still be hot. Please ex- the pressure gauge on the air pump.
press brake pedal. ercise appropriate caution.
The electric air pump should now be 왘 Store the electrical plug and the air
switched off. hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.
왘 Close the trunk lid.
왘 Drive away immediately.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.

306
 Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

If tire pressure has fallen below Follow recommend tire pressures. Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
vehicle. can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- to operate at higher speeds.
Park your vehicle safely away from the road- cause they are more likely to become punc- The sticker must be attached on the instru-
way and contact the nearest authorized tured or damaged by road debris, potholes ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside Assis- etc. the driver.
tance. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires Vehicle handling characteristics may
If tire pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), in- wear unevenly, adversely affect handling change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
flate tire to correct pressure (see label on and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
fuel filler flap), and drive vehicle to nearest from being overheated. 왘 Replace your TIREFIT kit every four
tire repair facility to have tire repaired or re- Do not overload the tires by exceeding the years. Kits are available at your autho-
placed. specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Recommended duration of use: ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
300miles (500km) at 50mph (80km/h) door opening). Overloading the tires can
with the recommended tire pressure. overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.
왘 Bring used TIREFIT materials to an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.

307
Practical hints
Flat tire

Sealing tires with TIREFIT kit 2

Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT Take care not to allow the contents of
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame than approx. 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire dam- clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-
or heat source. age caused by driving with extremely low lowed or absorbed through the skin - causes
tire pressure, or on a flat tire, or a damaged skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Do not smoke.
wheel. Any contact with eyes or skin should be
Small tire punctures, particularly those in Do not drive the vehicle under such circum- flushed immediately with plenty of water.
the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. stances. If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
TIREFIT can be used in ambient tempera- Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz Cen- change clothing as soon as possible.
tures down to -4°F (-20°C). ter for assistance or call Roadside In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
Assistance. physician immediately.

왘 Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)

should not be removed from the tire. Warning! G
왘 Take TIREFIT, the sticker, and the elec-
tric air pump out of the trunk. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
왘 Attach the sticker where it will be easily plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
seen by the driver on the instrument
Do not induce vomiting!
cluster.
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.

308
 Practical hints
Flat tire

i 왘 Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto 왘 Unscrew the valve cap from tire
If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You flange 6 of the TIREFIT container. valve 7.
can then peel it off. 왘 Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside down 왘 Screw filler hose 10 onto tire valve 7.
into notch 3 of the electric air pump.
왘 Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle cig-
arette lighter socket.
왘 Turn the key in the ignition to
position 1 (컄 page 29).
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 30) on the selector le-
ver once. Do not depress brake pedal.
왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 8.
1 TIREFIT container 7 Tire valve The electric air pump should now
2 Flap 8 Electric air pump switch switch on and inflate the tire.
3 Notch 9 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
4 Electrical plug screw !
5 Air hose 10 Filler hose Do not operate the electric air pump
6 Flange longer than eight minutes without in-
왘 Open flap 2 on the electric air pump. Warning! G terruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
왘 Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the You may operate the air pump again af-
Observe safety instructions on air pump la- ter it has cooled off.
pump housing.
bel.

309
Practical hints
Flat tire

After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must 왘 Detach the electric air pump.
display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air Warning! G The air hose may still be hot. Please ex-
hose can become hot during inflation.
If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not at- ercise appropriate caution.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
tained, tire is too severely damaged for 왘 Store the electrical plug and the air
왘 If this tire pressure is not attained, turn TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair. hose behind the flap and place the air
off the electric air pump, detach the fill-
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal pump back in the trunk.
er hose from the tire valve, and drive
vehicle back and forth very slowly ap- the tire. 왘 Close the trunk lid.
proximately 30 ft (10 m). Do not drive the vehicle. 왘 Drive away immediately.
This serves to better distribute the Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire. or call Roadside Assistance. evenly inside the tire.
왘 Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5 from
After attaining a tire pressure of 26 psi
flange 6 of the TIREFIT container. 왘
(1.8 bar), press 0 on electric air pump
Warning! G
왘 Inflate the tire again.
switch 8. Do not exceed vehicle speed of
The electric air pump should now be 50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
switched off. designed to operate at higher speeds.
왘 Turn the key in the ignition to The sticker must be attached on the instru-
position 0 (컄 page 29). ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
or
Vehicle handling characteristics may
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
button (컄 page 30) on the selector le-
ver once. Do not depress brake pedal.

310
 Practical hints
Flat tire

왘 After driving vehicle for an initial 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

10 minutes, check tire pressure using Warning! G Center as soon as possible to obtain a
the pressure gauge on the air pump. new TIREFIT kit.
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
왘 Bring used TIREFIT materials to an au-
Warning! G Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- proper disposal.
If tire pressure has fallen below cause they are more likely to become punc-
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
vehicle. etc. Warning! G
Park your vehicle safely away from the road- Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
way and contact the nearest authorized wear unevenly, adversely affect handling (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside Assis- and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail to operate at higher speeds.
tance. from being overheated.
The sticker must be attached on the instru-
If tire pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), in- Do not overload the tires by exceeding the ment cluster where it will be easily seen by
flate tire to correct pressure (see label on specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- the driver.
fuel filler flap), and drive vehicle to nearest ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can Vehicle handling characteristics may
tire repair facility to have tire repaired or re-
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
placed.
Recommended duration of use:
왘 Replace your TIREFIT container every
300miles (500km) at 50mph (80km/h)
four years. Replacement containers are
with the recommended tire pressure.
available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

311
Practical hints
Flat tire

Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle 왘 Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack
out of the storage compartment under
Prepare the vehicle as described above
the trunk floor (컄 page 289).
(컄 page 302).
Warning! G
왘 Turn spare wheel bracket counter-
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif- clockwise to loosen. Warning! G
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
왘 Take the wheel out of the trunk. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into
change when driving with a mounted spare
Lifting the vehicle both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid per-
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away sonal injury, use the jack only to lift the ve-
The spare wheel is for temporary use only. hicle during a wheel change. Never get
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
When driving with spare wheel mounted, en- beneath the vehicle while it is supported by
(not included) or other sizable objects.
sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When changing wheel on a level sur- area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
face: set parking brake and block wheels before
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel 왘 Place one chock in front of and one raising vehicle with jack.
replaced with a regular road wheel. behind the wheel that is diagonally Do not disengage parking brake while the
Never operate the vehicle with more than opposite to the wheel being vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
one spare wheel mounted. changed. always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
When changing wheel on a hill: pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
왘 Place chocks on the downhill side fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower
blocking both wheels of the other the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack-
axle. stands before working under the vehicle.

312
 Practical hints
Flat tire

왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do 1 Jack support tube cover (except 2 Jack support tube hole (SL 55 AMG and
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap- SL 55 AMG and vehicles with vehicles with Sport Package* only)
proximately one full turn with wrench). Sport Package*)
왘 Insert a flat blade screwdriver in the
The jack support tubes are located behind 왘 Open cover 1 by pressing at point indi- opening of cover 2 and pry it out.
the front wheel housings and in front of the cated by arrow.
왘 Remove cover 2, taking care not to
rear wheel housings. 왘 Remove cover 1, taking care not to damage the locking tabs.
damage the locking tabs.

313
Practical hints
Flat tire

왘 Keeping jack in this position, turn Removing the wheel

crank 3 clockwise until the jack base
meets the ground. Make sure the jack
is vertical (plumb line).
왘 Continue to turn the crank until the tire
is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.

1 Jack arm
2 Jack support tube hole 1 Alignment bolt
3 Crank
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re-
왘 Insert jack arm 1 fully into the tube move.
hole 2 up to the stop.
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with the align-
ment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
Warning! G 왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack sup- !
port tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause per-
This could result in damage to the bolt
sonal injury or damage to the vehicle.
and wheel hub threads.

왘 Remove the wheel.

314
 Practical hints
Flat tire

Mounting the new wheel

Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G Always replace wheel bolts that are dam- Only use genuine equipment
aged or rusted. Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identi-
Inflate spare wheel tire only after the wheel
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. fied by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
is properly mounted.
may come loose.
Inflate the spare wheel tire using the electric Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
pump (컄 page 316) before lowering the ve-
under these circumstances! Contact an au- hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
hicle.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call tip over.
Roadside Assistance.
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel hub.
tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the align- wheel to come off. This could cause an acci-
ment bolt and push it on. dent. Be sure to use the correct mounting
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them bolts.
slightly.

315
Practical hints
Flat tire

Inflating the spare tire 왘 Turn the key in the ignition to

position 1.
!
or
Do not lower the vehicle before inflat-
ing the spare wheel tire. Otherwise the 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
rim may be damaged. button on the selector lever once with-
out depressing the brake pedal.
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the 왘 Press 1 on the electric air pump switch.
trunk (컄 page 289).
The electric air pump should now
1 Flap switch on and inflate the tire.
Warning! G 2 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent 왘 Inflate the tire to approx. 36 psi
screw (2.5 bar).
Observe instructions on air pump label.
3 Union nut
This takes about five minutes for the
4 Electrical plug
spare tire. The air hose 2 and the union
왘 Open flap 1 on air pump. nut 3 can become hot duration infla-
왘 Pull out the electrical plug 4 and air tion. Exercise proper caution to avoid
hose with the pressure gauge 2. burning yourself when using the equip-
ment.
왘 Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
왘 Screw the air hose 2 onto the tire valve.
왘 Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle ci-
gar lighter socket.

316
 Practical hints
Flat tire

! 왘 Detach the electric air pump.

Do not operate the air pump longer Warning! G 왘 Stow the electrical plug and the air
than eight minutes without interrup- hose behind the flap and place the air
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
tion. Otherwise it may overheat. pump back in the trunk.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
You may operate the air pump again af- can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- i
ter it has cooled off. cause they are more likely to become punc- The flat tire may be transported in the
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes trunk when the retractable hardtop is
왘 Press 0 on the electric air pump switch. etc. lowered. Use the protective sheet pro-
왘 Turn the key in the ignition to Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires vided with the spare wheel. Do not ac-
position 0. wear unevenly, adversely affect handling tivate the tire inflation pressure
or and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail monitor until the deflated tire has been
from being overheated. removed from the vehicle.
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
on the selector lever twice without de-
pressing the brake pedal.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘 If the tire pressure is above 36 psi
(2.5 bar), release excess tire pressure
using the vent screw.

317
Practical hints
Flat tire

Lowering the vehicle Replacing jack support tube cover

왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
Warning! G 왘 Slide tongue of cover under the upper
terclockwise until the full weight of the Have the tightening torque checked after edge of the tube opening.
vehicle is resting on the ground. changing a wheel. The wheels could come 왘 Applying even pressure, press cover
왘 Pull the jack out of the jack support loose if they are not tightened to a torque of until it snaps into place. Be careful not
tube. 96 ft lb (130 Nm). to damage the locking tabs or clamp
the plastic retaining strap.
왘 Before storing the jack in the trunk,
crank back to storage position and fold
in the arm.

1 - 5 Wheel bolts
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 96 ft lb
(130 Nm).

318
 Practical hints
Batteries
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter- !
ies: Warning! G Never loosen or detach battery termi-
앫 The starter battery (located in the en- nal clamps while the engine is running
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
gine compartment) or the key is in the starter switch. Oth-
sult in severe injury or death.
erwise the alternator and other elec-
앫 The battery for electrical consumers Never lean over batteries while connecting, tronic components could be severely
(located in the trunk) you might get injured. damaged.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Have the starter battery checked regu-
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, larly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately Center
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary. Refer to Service Booklet for mainte-
nance intervals or contact your autho-
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
which is flammable and explosive. Keep information.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
Starter battery in the engine compartment smoking, etc.
Warning! G
1 Positive terminal
2 Negative terminal Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an acci-
dent.

319
Practical hints
Batteries

Disconnecting the battery for electrical

Warning! G Warning! G consumers

The brake system requires electrical power With a disconnected battery 왘 Unhook the luggage cover in the trunk.
to operate. 앫 you will no longer be able to turn the key 왘 Remove the trunk floor.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply in the starter switch and pressing the The battery for electrical consumers is
or electrical system may impair brake sys- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (if so located in the right hand area of the
tem operation and switch it into its equipped) on the selector lever will have
trunk (컄 page 289).
limp-home (emergency operation) mode. no effect
앫 the selector lever will remain locked in 왘 Use the 10 mm open-end wrench from
The same applies if battery is disconnected.
position P the vehicle tool kit to disconnect the
To brake, the driver must then apply signifi-
battery negative lead.
cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de-
press the pedal much further to obtain the Disconnecting the batteries 왘 Remove the cover from the positive ter-
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply minal.
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are ! 왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead.
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
To avoid damage to electrical compo-
distance is increased! Adjust your driving
nents, always disconnect the battery Disconnecting the starter battery
style accordingly. SBC brake system
for electrical consumers (in trunk) first. 왘 Use the 10 mm open-end wrench from
(컄 page 72).
This applies even if you only wish to the vehicle tool kit to disconnect the
charge the starter battery. Otherwise battery negative lead.
the electronics of the vehicle can be
damaged. 왘 Remove the cover from the positive ter-
minal.
왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead.

320
 Practical hints
Batteries

Removing the batteries Charging and reinstalling batteries Reconnecting the batteries

왘 Charge batteries in accordance with !

Removing the battery for electrical con- the instructions of the battery charger
sumers To avoid damage to electrical compo-
manufacturer.
nents, always reconnect the starter
왘 Remove the screws securing the bat-
왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow battery (in engine compartment) first.
tery in the trunk.
the previously described steps in re-
왘 Remove the battery support and brack- verse order. Reconnecting the starter battery
et. Take out the battery.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
Removing the starter battery
Warning! G 왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its
왘 Remove the screws securing the start- Never charge a battery while still installed in cover.
er battery in the engine compartment. the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg- 왘 Connect the negative lead.
ing and cause explosions that may result in
왘 Lift the retaining bracket and remove !
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
the battery.
Never invert the terminal connections!

!
The battery, its filler caps, and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.

321
Practical hints
Batteries

Reconnecting the battery for electrical !

consumers Never invert the terminal connections!
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its i
cover. The following procedures must be car-
ried out following any interruption of
왘 Connect the negative lead.
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
왘 Reinstall the trunk floor. tion):
왘 Rehook trunk luggage cover into hold- 앫 Resynchronize the ESP
ers. (컄 page 261).
앫 Resynchronize side windows
(컄 page 158).

322
 Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Observe the following: !
Warning! G 앫 Jump starting should only be performed Jump starting may only be performed
when the engine and catalytic convert- on the battery installed in the engine
Failure to follow these directions will cause
er are cold. compartment.
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
injury or death. frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. tempts.
Never lean over batteries while connecting 앫 Only use 12V batteries to jump start Do not attempt to start the engine us-
or jump starting, you might get injured. your vehicle. Jump starting with a more ing a battery quick charge unit.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not powerful battery could damage the ve- If the engine does not run after several
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, hicle’s electrical system, which will not unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately be covered by the Mercedes-Benz checked at the nearest authorized
flush affected area with water, and seek Limited Warranty. Mercedes-Benz Center.
medical help if necessary. 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient Excessive unburned fuel generated by
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, cross section and insulated terminal repeated failed starting attempts may
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep clamps. damage the catalytic converter and
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid Always make sure that the jumper ca- may present a fire risk.
improper connection of jumper cables, bles are not on or near pulleys, fans, or
smoking etc.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
other parts that move when the engine have loose or missing insulation.
Read all instructions before proceeding. is started or running.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
If the starter battery is discharged, the en- other end is still attached to a battery.
gine can be started with jumper cables and
the battery of another vehicle.

323
Practical hints
Jump starting

왘 Connect the negative terminals 1 and 2

Warning! G of the batteries with the jumper cables.
Start with the charged battery.
Never lean over the battery while connect-
ing or jump starting. 왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
Now you can again turn on the electri-
Warning! G cal consumers. Do not turn on the
lights under any circumstances.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
Do not smoke. 1 Negative terminal of charged battery the negative terminals 1 and 2 of the
Observe all safety instructions and precau- 2 Negative terminal of discharged batteries and then from the positive
tions when handling automotive batteries battery terminals 3 and 4.
(컄 page 232). 3 Positive terminal of discharged battery
왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
4 Positive terminal of charged battery
est Mercedes-Benz Center.
The starter battery is located in the engine 왘 Remove the red cover from positive ter-
compartment. minal on both vehicles (컄 page 319). i
왘 Make sure that the two vehicles do not 왘 Connect the positive terminals 3 and 4 The vehicle cannot be started via
touch. of the batteries with the jumper cables. tow-start.

왘 Turn off the engine. Start with the charged battery.

왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Start the engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘 Apply parking brake.
왘 Shift selector lever to position P.

324
 Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- When circumstances do not permit the !
cle be transported with all wheels off the recommended towing methods, the vehi- To be certain to avoid a possibility of
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel cle may be towed with all wheels on the damage to the transmission, however,
lift/dolly equipment. ground or front wheels raised only so far as we recommend the drive shaft be dis-
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a connected at the rear axle drive flange
! safe location where the recommended for any towing beyond a short tow to a
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- towing methods can be employed. nearby garage.
ment with key in starter switch turned
to position 0. !
If the vehicle is towed with the front
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
Towing with sling-type equipment over
(key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
supports.
engaged and will apply the rear wheel
To prevent damage during transport, brakes.
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts. When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the be in position N and the key must be in
automatic central locking. starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for dis-
tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50
km/h).

325
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

i
Warning! G To signal turns while being towed with
Warning! G
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
If circumstances require towing the vehicle The brake system requires electrical power
key in starter switch to position 2 and
with all wheels on the ground, always tow to operate.
activate the combination switch for the
with a tow bar if: A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
left or right turn signal in the usual
앫 the engine will not run manner – only the selected turn signal or electrical system may impair brake sys-
앫 there is a malfunction in the SBC brake will operate. tem operation and switch it into its
system limp-home (emergency operation) mode. To
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz- brake, the driver must then apply signifi-
앫 there is a malfunction in the power sup- ard warning flasher will operate again.
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de-
press the pedal much further to obtain the
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
trol the towed vehicle.
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
the ground, make certain that the key is in distance is increased! Adapt your driving
starter switch position 2. style accordingly. SBC brake system
If the key is left in the starter switch (컄 page 72).
position 0 for an extended period of time, it With the engine not running, there is no
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this power assistance for the steering system. In
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re- this case, it is important to keep in mind that
move key from starter switch and reinsert. a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
essary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driv-
ing accordingly.

326
 Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

! i Installing towing eye bolt

When towing the vehicle with all wheels The selector lever will remain locked in
on the ground, please note the follow- position P and the key will not turn in Front of vehicle
ing: the starter switch if the battery is dis-
With the automatic central locking acti- connected or discharged. See notes on
vated and the key in starter switch the battery (컄 page 319) or on jump
position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop starting (컄 page 323).
button (if so equipped) in position 2,
the vehicle doors lock if the left front
wheel as well as the right rear wheel
are turning at vehicle speeds of approx.
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
1 Cover on right side of front bumper.
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking (컄 page 91). To remove cover:
Towing of the vehicle should only be 왘 Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
done using the properly installed tow- row.
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, 왘 Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chas- towing eye bolt.
sis, frame or suspension parts.

327
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

The towing eye bolt is supplied with the Rear of vehicle

tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the trunk floor).
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘 Fit cover and snap into place.

2 Cover on right side of rear bumper

To remove cover:
왘 Pull cover in the direction of arrow.
왘 Fold cover down to reveal threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the trunk floor).
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘 Fit cover and snap into place.

328
 Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
i Main fuse box Closing
Only install fuses that have been tested 왘 Hook cover onto tabs and close.
The main fuse box is in the engine com-
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
partment on the driver’s side in front of the 왘 Move slide to position 2.
that have the specified amperage rat-
bulkhead (wall separating the engine and
ing. !
passenger compartments).
Never attempt to repair or bridge a The fuse box cover must be properly
blown fuse. Have the cause determined positioned with the slide at the ‹
and remedied by an authorized symbol to prevent moisture or dirt from
Mercedes-Benz Center. entering the fuse box and possibly im-
pairing fuse operation.

Fuse chart
The fuse chart is found in the vehicle tool
kit in the trunk. The amperages of the fus-
es are also given there.
1 Main fuse box
2 Unlocking Spare fuses
3 Locking
Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit
Opening in the trunk.

왘 Move slide to position 3 and lift cover. Fuse extractor

The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk.

329
330
 Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information

331
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of original spare parts re- The use of non-genuine parts and ac-
quired for maintenance and repair work. In cessories not authorized by
addition, strategically located parts distri- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehi-
bution centers provide quick and reliable cle, which is not covered by the
parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300 000 different spare parts could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
for Mercedes-Benz models are available. bility or safety.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.

332
 Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the “warranties” printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your and Accessories warranties, copies of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- which are available at any Mercedes-Benz Should you lose your Service and Warranty
change or repair any defective parts origi- Center. Information booklet, have your authorized
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
with the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty

333
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels

1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
(above driver’s door lock latch) (below right rear storage compart- 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
ment) 5 Emission control label
6 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.

334
 Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
SL 500 SL 55 AMG

1 Automatic belt tensioner The SL 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts.

2 Power steering pump 1 Idler pulley
3 Air conditioner compressor 2 Automatic belt tensioner
4 Crankshaft 3 Power steering pump
5 Coolant pump 4 Air conditioner compressor
6 Generator (alternator) 5 Crankshaft
7 Idler pulley 6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
10 Super charger

335
Technical data
Engine
Engine

Model SL 500 (230.475(1)) SL 55 AMG (230.474(1))

Engine 113 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.60 in (92.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 302.9 cu.in. (4966 cm ) 331.8 cu.in. (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 302 hp/5600 rpm 493 hp/6100 rpm
(225 kW/5600 rpm) (368 kW/6100 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 339 ft.lb/2700 rpm 516 ft.lb/2750-4000 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 rpm) (700 Nm/2750-4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 7 ft 10 in (2390 mm) 8 ft 1 in/4 ft 3 in (2462 mm/1289 mm)
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.

336
 Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Only use tires and rims which have been ! i
specifically developed for your vehicle and Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental exhibit dimensional variations and dif- Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
effects, such as ferent tire deformation characteristics pressure table is located on the fuel fill-
앫 poor handling characteristics that could cause them to come into er cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
contact with the vehicle body or axle should be checked regularly and
앫 increased noise
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehi- should only be adjusted on cold tires.
앫 increased fuel consumption cle may be the result. Follow tire manufacturer’s mainte-
nance recommendation included with
vehicle.

Same size tires

SL 500 SL 55 AMG
1
Rims (light alloy) 8 /2J x17 81/2 J x18
Wheel offset 1.38 in (35 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 255/45 R17 98W –
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 255/45 R17 98V M+S 255/40 R18 95V M+S

337
Technical data
Rims and tires

Mixed size tires

SL 500 (Sport Package*) SL 55 AMG

Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 81/2J x18 81/2J x18
Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 255/40 R18 95W or 255/40 R18 95Y 255/40 R18 95W or 255/40 R18 95Y
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 91/2Jx18 91/2Jx18
Wheel offset 1.30 in (33 mm) 1.30 in (33 mm)
1 1
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 285/35 R18 97W or 285/35 R18 97Y 285/35 R18 97W1 or 285/35 R18 97Y1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.

Spare wheel i
The SL 55 AMG is not equipped with a
SL 500 spare wheel. TIREFIT (컄 page 302).
Rim 6B x17 ET25
Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm)
Collapsible tire 185/60-17-93P1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.

338
 Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system

Model SL 500 SL 55 AMG

Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
Starter battery 12 V/35 Ah 12 V/35 Ah
Battery for electrical consumers 12 V/70 Ah 12 V/70 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPER NGK IL FR 6 A
NGK PFR 5 R-11
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)

339
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions

Model SL 500 SL 55 AMG

Overall vehicle length 178.4 in (4531 mm) 178.4 in (4531 mm)
Overall vehicle length when opening/ 185.4 in (4709 mm) 185.4 in (4709 mm)
closing hardtop
Overall vehicle width 71.9 in (1827 mm) 71.9 in (1827 mm)
Overall vehicle height 51.1 in (1295 mm) 51.1 in (1295 mm)
Overall vehicle height when opening/ 65.9 in (1674 mm) 65.9 in (1674 mm)
closing hardtop
Wheelbase 100.8 in (2560 mm) 100.8 in (2560 mm)
Track, front 61.4 in (1559 mm) 61.8 in (1569 mm)
Track, rear 60.9 in (1547 mm) 61.1 in (1551 mm)

340
 Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

341
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
lubricants must match. Therefore only use vice Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
brands tested and recommended by us. Mercedes-Benz Center.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Engine with oil filter SL 500 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) Recommended engine oils
SL 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Automatic transmission 9.1 US qt (8.6 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
Rear axle 1.5 US qt (1.4 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Hydraulic system for active body control (ABC) approx. 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) MB Hydraulic Fluid
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 1.1 US qt (1.05 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system SL 500 approx. 12.2 US qt (11.6 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
SL 55 AMG approx. 13.7 US qt (13 l)
Fuel tank 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including a reserve of 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/
86 MON)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lu-
bricant oil (never R-12)
1 MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10

342
 Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Hydraulic system for retractable hardtop 0.42 US qt (0.4 l) MB Hydraulic Fluid
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 7.4 US qt (7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 346).

Engine oils Engine oil additives Brake fluid

Engine oils are specifically tested for their Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. During vehicle operation, the boiling point
suitability in our engines. Therefore, only They may be harmful to the engine opera- of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
use engine oils recommended by tion. through the absorption of moisture from
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recom- the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
mended brands is available in the Factory ous operating conditions, this moisture
blending oil additives are not covered by
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at content can lead to the formation of bub-
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
tem’s efficiency.
Please follow FSS recommendations for Air conditioner refrigerant
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
could result in engine damage not covered R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG placed every two years, preferably in the
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. lubricating oil are used in the air condition- spring.
er system.
Only brake fluid approved by
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu- Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
bricating oil, otherwise damage to the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
system will occur. vide you with additional information.

343
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Gasoline additives

! Only use Premium unleaded meeting A major concern among engine manufac-
ASTM standard D 439: turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
To maintain the engine’s durability and
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
performance, premium unleaded gaso- 앫 The octane number (posted at the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
line must be used. If premium unleaded pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
that prevent the build up of carbon depos-
is not available and low octane fuel is of both the Research (R) octane num-
its.
used, follow these precautions: ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the After an extended period of using fuels
앫 have the fuel tank only partially
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. without such additives carbon deposits
filled with unleaded regular and fill
can build up, especially on the intake
up with premium unleaded as soon Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
valves and in the combustion area, leading
as possible such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
to engine performance problems such as:
used provided the ratio of any one of these
앫 avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 앫 warm-up hesitation
acceleration
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%. 앫 unstable idle
앫 do not exceed an engine speed of
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded 앫 knocking/pinging
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
with a light load such as two per- 앫 misfire
sons and no luggage Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% 앫 power loss
앫 do not exceed 2/3 of maximum ac-
Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be Do not blend other specific fuel additives
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
used. with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain These blends must also meet all other fuel cost and may be harmful to the engine op-
requirements, such as resistance to spark eration.
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

344
 Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Damage or malfunctions resulting from The coolant solution must be used year heat transfer capability of the solution.
poor fuel quality or from blending specific round to provide the necessary corrosion Therefore, do not use more than this
fuel additives are not covered by the protection and increase in the boil-over amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. protection. You should have it replaced ev-
If the coolant level is low, water and
ery 15 years or 150000 miles (250000
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Coolants km), whichever comes first.
should be used to bring it up to the proper
Coolant system design and coolant used level (have cooling system checked for
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
stipulate the replacement interval. The signs of leakage). Please make sure that
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
above replacement interval is only applica- the mixture is in accordance with label in-
vides:
ble if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze structions.
앫 corrosion protection solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
The water in the cooling system must meet
freeze protection products of equal specification (see Facto-
앫 minimum requirements, which are usually
ry Approved Service Products pamphlet)
앫 boiling protection (by increasing the satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are used to renew the coolant concentra-
boiling point) are not sure about the water quality, con-
tion or bring it back up to the proper level.
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
The cooling system was filled at the factory To provide important corrosion protection, Center.
with a coolant providing freeze protection the solution must be at least 45% anticor-
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro- rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
sion protection. protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to you use a solution that is more than 55%
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool- anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is tion to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). temperature will increase due to the lower

345
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze parts. (Failure to use such anticorro- Before the start of the winter season (or
sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig- once a year in hot southern regions), you
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
nificantly shortened service life.) should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
concentration checked. The coolant is also
nents in motor vehicle engines Therefore, the following product is strongly
regularly checked each time you bring your
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze recommended for use in your vehicle:
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
coolant used in such engines be specifical- Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Anti-
Center for service.
ly formulated to protect the aluminum freeze Agent.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Model Approx. freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
SL 500 6.1 US qt (5.8 l) 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
SL 55 AMG 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) 7.6 US qt (7.2 l)

346
 Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Windshield and headlamp washer Windshield and headlamp washer fluid

system mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing use
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
systems are supplied from the windshield
and water:
washer fluid reservoir.
앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts water
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
reservoir has a capacity of approx. (40 ml “S” to 4 l water)
7.4 US qt. (7 l). For temperatures below freezing use
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
Washer Concentrate and water (or con- and commercially available premixed
centrate and commercially available windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
premixed windshield washer 앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
solvent/antifreeze, depending on am-
bient temperatures). (40 ml “S” to 4 l solvent).

Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts because it may ignite.
You could be seriously burned.

347
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
This has been prepared as required of all Treadwear Traction
manufacturers of passenger cars under Ti-
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades, from highest to lowest
tle 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
tested under controlled conditions on a sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
specified government test course. For ex- ment as measured under controlled
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test
Uniform tire quality grading
and one-half (1½) times as well on the gov- surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The marked C may have poor traction perfor-
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
relative performance of tires depends mance.
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
upon the actual conditions of their use,
shoulder and maximum section width. For
however, and may depart significantly
example:
from the norm due to variations in driving
Warning! G
Tread wear Traction Temperature habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is
road characteristics and climate. based on straightahead braking traction
200 AA A
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
All passenger car tires must conform to
characteristics.
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.

348
 Technical data
Consumer information

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
Warning! G
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.

349
350
 Technical terms

ABS BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Bi-Xenon headlamps*

(Antilock Brake System) system Headlamps which use an electric arc as
Prevents the wheels from locking up This system detects if a special system the light source and produce a more in-
during braking so that the vehicle can compatible child restraint seat is in- tense light than filament headlamps.
continue to be steered. stalled on the front passenger seat. The Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
system will automatically deactivate beam and high beam.
ABC
the passenger front airbag when such a
(Active Body Control) CAC
seat is properly installed (indicator
Active, computer-controlled system (Customer Assistance Center)
lamp 7 on the glove box lights up).
that hydraulically adjusts the suspen- Mercedes-Benz customer service cen-
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz
sion at all four wheels in response to ter, which can help you with any ques-
Center for availability.
various driving situations. tions about your vehicle and provide
BabySmartTM compatible child seats assistance in the event of a break-
Alignment bolt
Special restraint system for children. down.
Metal pin with thread. The alignment
The sensor system for the passenger
bolt, or centering bolt, is an aid used CAN system
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
when changing a tire to align the wheel (Controller Area Network)
senger side airbag if a BabySmartTM
with the wheel hub. Data bus network serving to control ve-
compatible child seat is installed.
hicle functions such as door locking or
BAS windshield wiping depending on vehi-
(Brake Assist System) cle settings and/or ambient condi-
System for potentially reducing braking tions.
distances in emergency braking situa-
tions. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.

351
Technical terms

Cockpit the multifunction steering wheel to Engine number

All instruments, switches, buttons and navigate through the system and to ad- The number set by the manufacturer
indicator/warning lamps in the passen- just settings. and placed on the cylinder block to
ger compartment needed for vehicle uniquely identify each engine pro-
Cruise control
operation and monitoring. duced.
Driving convenience system for auto-
Collapsible tire matically maintaining the vehicle speed ESP
An especially compact spare tire that set by the driver. (Electronic Stability Program)
must be inflated with a provided air Improves vehicle handling and direc-
Distronic*
pump before using. It should only be tional stability.
A driving convenience cruise control
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest
system which helps the driver maintain ETD
service station.
a pre-selected speed: (Emergency Tensioning Device)
COMAND 앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead, Device which deploys in certain frontal
(Cockpit Management and the system operates in the same and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
Data System) way as conventional cruise control. tem's threshold to tighten the seat
Information and operating center for belts.
vehicle sound and communications 앫 If a slower moving vehicle is ahead, ->SRS
systems, including the radio and CD Distronic* will reduce your vehicle
FSS
changer, as well as for other optional speed to the extent permitted by re-
(Flexible Service System)
equipment (e.g. telephone). duced throttle and up to 20% brak-
Service indicator in the multifunction
ing power to maintain the preset
Control system display that informs the driver when
minimum following distance.
The control system is used to call up the next vehicle maintenance service is
vehicle information and to change DTR due.
component settings. Information and (->Distronic*)
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on

352
 Technical terms

Gear range KEYLESS-GO* Memory function

Number of gears which are available to System for entering and operating the Used to store three individual seat,
the automatic transmission for shifting. vehicle without the use of a key. steering wheel and mirror positions for
The automatic gear shifting process each key and, if so equipped,
Kickdown
can be adapted to specific operating KEYLESS-GO* feature.
Depressing the accelerator past the
conditions using the selector lever.
point of resistance shifts the transmis- Menu
GPS sion down to the lowest possible gear. The control system displays are ar-
(Global Positioning System) This very quickly accelerates the vehi- ranged in menus. Each menu contains
Satellite-based system for relaying cle and should not be used for normal a number of commands for particular
geographic location information to and acceleration needs. systems. In the Audio menu, for exam-
from vehicles equipped with special re- ple, you will find the commands Select
Voice control system*
ceivers. Employs CD digital maps for radio station or Operate CD player. Us-
Voice control system for car phones,
navigation. ing commands you can directly change
portable cell phones and audio sys-
the settings for your vehicle.
Head-thorax airbag tems (radio, CD, etc.).
Installed in the doors, these airbags Lock button MON
protect occupants during side impact Button on the door which indicates The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
collisions exceeding a preset thresh- whether the door is locked or un- as determined by a standardized
old. Unlike normal side airbags, locked. Pushing the lock button down method. It is an indication of a gaso-
head-thorax airbags are also designed on an individual door from inside will line's ability to resist undesired detona-
to provide protection for the head area. lock that door. tion (knocking). The average of both
Instrument cluster the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
The displays and indicator/warning RON (Research Octane Number) is
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in- posted at the pump, also known as AN-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer, TI-KNOCK INDEX.
engine temperature and fuel gauge.

353
Technical terms

Multifunction display Power train Remote Vehicle Diagnostics

Two display fields in the instrument Collective term designating all compo- Transmission of vehicle data and cur-
cluster used to present information nents used to generate and transmit rent location to the Mercedes-Benz
provided by the control system. motive power to the drive axles, includ- Customer Assistance Center for sub-
ing scribers to Tele Aid service.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operat- 앫 engine REST
ing the control system. (Residual Engine Heat Utilization)
앫 clutch/torque converter
Feature that uses the engine heat
Overspeed range 앫 transmission stored in the coolant to heat the vehi-
Engine speeds within the red marking
앫 transfer case cle interior for a short time after the en-
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this en-
gine has been turned off.
gine speed range, as it may result in se- 앫 drive shaft
rious engine damage that is not Retractable hardtop
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited 앫 differential Hardtop roof that can be opened and
Warranty. 앫 axle shafts/axles closed at the push of a button and
Parktronic* stored in the trunk.
Program mode selector switch
System which uses visual and acoustic Used to switch the automatic transmis- Roll bar
signals to assist the driver during park- sion between standard operation (S) Occupant protection system which
ing maneuvers. and winter operation (W). consists of tubular steel sheathed in
plastic. The roll bar is lowered into the
Poly-V-belt drive SL 55 AMG with steering wheel gear-
car body during normal driving condi-
Drives engine-components (alternator, shift control and manual shift program:
tions and raised automatically. It may
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. in addition to S and W (for regular S or
also be manually raised and lowered by
winter W operation, see above), you
operating a button during critical driv-
can use MANUAL for manual shift pro-
ing situations.
gram

354
 Technical terms

RON SRS Tightening torque

The Research Octane Number for gaso- (Supplemental Restraint System) Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
line as determined by a standardized Seat belts, emergency tensioning de- wrench) with which threaded fasteners
method. It is an indication of a gaso- vice and airbags. Though independent such as wheel bolts are tightened.
line's ability to resist undesired detona- systems, they are closely interfaced to
TIREFIT
tion (knocking). The average of both provide effective occupant protection.
Accessory for emergency and tempo-
the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
Tele Aid System rary tire repair. The TIREFIT kit consists
RON (Research Octane Number) is
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-- of a container with sealant material, a
posted at the pump, also known as AN-
mand) filler hose, a valve stem tool, a valve in-
TI-KNOCK INDEX.
The Tele Aid system consists of three sert, and an air compressor.
SBC types of response: automatic and man-
Tire speed rating
(Sensotronic Brake Control) ual emergency, roadside assistance
Part of tire designation; indicates the
Electronically controlled hydraulic and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
speed range for which a tire is ap-
braking system for increased braking tivated by completing a subscriber
proved.
safety and comfort. agreement and placing an acquain-
tance call. Traction
Shift lock Force exerted by the vehicle on the
The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
When the vehicle is parked, this lock road via the tires.
viding that the vehicle’s battery is
prevents the transmission selector le-
charged, properly connected, not dam-
ver from being inadvertently moved out
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
of position P without key turned and
available.
brake pedal depressed.

355
Technical terms

Vehicle level control Wind screen

The ground clearance of the vehicle is Screen for deflecting wind from the ve-
automatically controlled according to a hicle interior when the hardtop is low-
selected setting and speed. The driver ered.
can choose manually within a range of
Xenon headlamps
ground clearance, for example on very
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
rough roads.
the light source and produce a more in-
VIN tense light than filament headlamps.
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.

356
 Index

A Ignition 29 Seat in the lumbar region 94

ABC 183, 351 Immobilizer 48, 75 Seat in the shoulder region 94
Messages in display 258 Parktronic* 189 Seats 32
Oil level 230 Rear window defroster 153 Steering wheel 34
Setting vehicle level 184 Residual heat 154 Air conditioner (cooling)
ABC switch 24 Seat heater 97, 98 Turning off 155
ABS 68, 351 Seat ventilation* 96 Turning on 155
Malfunction indicator lamp 21, 251 Steering wheel gearshift control Air conditioner refrigerant 343
Messages in display 259 (SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 143 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Warning lamp 70, 251 Tow-away alarm 77 Air pump, electric 289
ABS/ESP Windshield wipers 44 Turning on 316
Warning lamp 250 Active Body Control (ABC) switch 24 Air recirculation mode 152
ABS/ESP warning lamp 21 Adjusting Air volume adjustment 150
Activating Air distribution 151 Airbags 53
Air circulation mode 152 Air volume 150 Children 54
Air conditioning (cooling) 155 Backrest tilt 33 Front 57
Anti-theft alarm system 76 Exterior rear view mirrors 35 Head-thorax 57, 58
Central locking (control system) 128 Head restraint height 33 Kneebag 57
Distance warning function* 180 Head restraint tilt 34 Passenger 57
Distronic* 175 Inside rear view mirror 35 Alarm
Easy-entry/exit feature 129 Lumbar support 93 Audible 67, 75
Electric air pump 316 Mirrors 35 Canceling 76
ESP 72 Multicontour backrest* 93 Visual 75
Exterior lamps 102 Seat cushion depth 33 Alignment bolt 351
Hazard warning flasher 105 Seat cushion tilt 33 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 288, 314
High beams 104 Seat height 33 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 342, 346

357
Index

Anti-theft alarm system 75 Manual shifting 138 Batteries, electronic key

Arming 76 One-touch gearshifting 138 Changing 293
Canceling the alarm 76 Program mode selector switch 24, Check lamp 81
Disarming 76 141 Checking 82
Anti-theft systems Selector lever 24 Batteries, KEYLESS-GO* card
Anti-theft alarm system 75 Selector lever position 137 Changing 294
Tow-away alarm 77 Transmission fluid 230 Check lamp 87
Aquaplaning see Hydroplanning 219 Winter program mode 141 Checking 87
Armrest Auxiliary cup holder 191 Batteries, vehicle 232
Storage space 193 Inserting 191 Charging 321
Ashtray 23, 196 Removing 192 Disconnecting 320
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 230 For electrical consumers 232, 289,
B
Automatic climate control 23, 147 319
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
Center air vents 23 For starter 232, 319
system 64, 351
Deactivating 154 Messages in display 263, 264
BabySmartTM compatible child
Residual heat utilization 154 Reconnecting 321
seats 351
Side air vents 23 Removing 321
Backrest supports
Temperature sensor 25 Service 319
Lumbar region 94
Automatic transmission 137 Bi-Xenon headlamps 351
Shoulder region 94
Emergency operation (Limp Home Block heater 240
Backrest tilt 33
Mode) 144 Brake fluid 226, 342, 343
Backup lamp bulbs 296
Gear ranges 139 Brake lamp bulb, high mounted 296
Backup lamps 299
Gear shifting malfunctions 144 Brake lamp bulbs, left and right 296
BAS 68, 69, 351
Kickdown 142 Brake pads
Messages in display 260
Manual shift program mode Message in display 265
(SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 142

358
 Index

Brakes 216 Centigrade Vehicle lock status (KEYLESS-GO*

Warning lamp 253 Setting temperature units 122 card) 87
Break-in period 214 Central locking Child safety
Bulbs, replacing Automatic 91 Airbags 54
Backup lamps 299 Central locking switch 92 Automatic child seat recognition 64
Brake lamps 296 Switching on/off (control Infant and child restraint systems 52
Front lamps 295, 298 system) 128 Cigarette lighter 23, 197
License plate lamps 300 Unlocking from inside 92 Cleaning
Parking lamps 299 Central locking switch 23 Headlamps 146
Rear fog lamp 299 Central unlocking switch 23 Windshield 44
Standing lamps 299 Changing Clock 19
Tail lamp assemblies 299 Batteries (key) 293 Closing
Turn signal lamps, front 298 Batteries (KEYLESS-GO* card) 294 Glove box 190
Turn signal lamps, rear 299 Key setting 81 Hood 228
KEYLESS-GO* card setting 86 Retractable hardtop (electronic
C
Vehicle level 185 key) 164
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 351
Charging Retractable hardtop (switch) 161
CAN System 351
Vehicle batteries 321 Side windows 158
Capacities
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator Side windows (KEYLESS-GO*) 88
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 342
lamp 21, 256 Sunshade* 167
Catalytic converter 223
Checking Trunk lid 83, 91
CD player
Batteries (KEYLESS-GO* card) 87 Cockpit 352
Operating 116
Coolant level 230 Collapsible tire 352
Center air vents 23
Oil level 226, 228 COMAND 23
Center console
Tire inflate pressure 226 COMAND* 352
Lower part 24
Vehicle lighting 226 COMAND*, radio and telephone 222
Upper part 23

359
Index

Combination switch 19, 43, 104 Temperature gauge 108 Alarm 76

Consumer information 348 Temperature warning lamp 21 Anti-theft alarm system 76
Control system 110, 113, 352 Warning lamp 254 Automatic climate control 154
AUDIO menu 115 Cooling see Air conditioner Central locking (control system) 128
Convenience submenu 129 Courtesy lighting 107 Cruise control 169
Distronic* menu 117 Cruise control 168, 262, 352 Distance warning function* 180
Functions 111 Canceling 169 Distronic* 178
Instrument cluster submenu 122 Driving downhill 169 Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 49
Lighting submenu 124 Driving uphill 169 Engine with the key 48
Malfunction memory menu 118 Fine adjustment 170 ESP 71
Menus 111 Setting 170 Exterior lamps 102
Multifunction display 110 Setting a higher speed 170 Hazard warning flasher 105
Multifunction steering wheel 111 Setting a lower speed 170 Headlamps 48, 102
NAVI menu 117 Setting speed 169, 170 Immobilizer 75
Standard display menu 110, 115 Cruise control lever 19, 168 Interior light delayed switch-off 127
Submenus 114 For cruise control 168 Parktronic* 189
TEL* menu 133 For Distronic* 175 Rear window defroster 153
Trip computer menu 131 Cup holder 23, 190 Residual heat 154
Vehicle submenu 127 Opening 190 Seat heater 97, 98
Coolant 345 Customer Assistance Center 351 Seat ventilation* 96
Adding 231 Steering wheel gearshift control
D
Anticorrosion/antifreeze (SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 143
Daytime running lamp mode 103
quantity 346 Tow-away alarm 77
Setting 124
Checking level 230 Deep water see Standing water
Deactivating
Messages in display 272, 273, 274 Defrosting 151
Air conditioning (cooling) 155
Temperature 224
Air recirculation mode 152

360
 Index

Delayed switch-off Deactivating 178 Downhill driving

Exterior lamps 125 Deceleration 174 Cruise control 169
Interior lighting 127 Decreasing time interval 179 Drink holder see Cup holder
Digital clock 19 Displays 173 Drinking and driving 215
Direction of rotation (tires) 235 Distance warning function 179 Drive sensibly - save fuel 215
Displays Distance warning function switch 24 Driving 37, 42
Distronic* 173 Driving hints 180 Driving abroad 222
Messages 287 DTR warning lamp 173 Driving hints
Parktronic* 187 Fine adjustment 177 Distronic* 180
Service indicator 241 Increasing time interval 179 SBC brake system 74
Distance to empty (range) Intermittent signal tone 173 Driving instructions 215
Calling up 133 Messages in display 262 Driving off 218
Distance warning function* 179 Setting a higher speed 176 Driving safety systems 68
Activating 180 Setting a slower speed 177 ABS 68
Deactivating 180 Setting distance 24 BAS 69
DTR* warning lamp 179 Setting speed 176 ESP 70
Intermittent warning sound 179 Setting stored speed 177 Driving systems 168
Symbol 117, 174 Warning and indicator lamps 173 ABC 183
Distance warning function* switch 24 Distronic* warning lamp 21 Cruise control 168
Distronic indicator lamp* 21 Door control panel 19, 26 Distronic* 171
Distronic* 171, 352 Door handle 26 Parktronic* 186
Activating 175 Doors Vehicle level control 184
Calling up settings 117, 174 Message in display 286 DTR* see Distronic*
Cleaning sensors 246 Opening 89
Cover 246 Opening from inside vehicle 89
Cruise control lever 175 Storage compartments 192

361
Index

E Engine F
Easy-entry/exit 129 Compartment 227 Fahrenheit
Interrupting movement 130 Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 40 Setting temperature units 122
Message in display 271 Starting with the key 40 Fastening the seat belts 37
Easy-Pack 198 Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 49 Fine adjustment
Lowering manually 292 Turning off with the key 48 Cruise control 170
Electric air pump 316 Engine number 352 Distronic* 177
Electrical consumer battery 232 Engine oil 228, 343 First aid kit 288
Electrical outlet 199 Adding 229 Flat tire 302
Electronic Stability Program see ESP Additives 343 Spare wheel 312
Emergency call system* Checking level 228 TIREFIT kit 302, 308
Initiating emergency call 203 Consumption 228 Flexible Service System (FSS) 241
Requirements 201 Filler neck 229 Fog lamp, rear 104, 296
Emergency engine shut-down 50 Messages in display 280 Replacing bulb 299
Emergency operation (Limp Home Engine oil level see Oil level 226 Fog lamps, front 104
Mode) 144 ESP 68, 70, 352 Replacing bulbs 296
Emergency operations Messages in display 261 Front airbags 57
Locking the vehicle 292 Switching off 71 Front lamps 296
Lowering Easy-Pack 292 Switching on 72 Replacing bulbs 298
Unlocking interior storage ESP control switch 24 FSS (Flexible Service System) 241, 352
compartments 291 ESP/ABS warning lamp 21
Unlocking the trunk 291 ETD (emergency tensioning device) 52,
Unlocking the vehicle 290 60, 352
Emission control 224
Emission control label 334

362
 Index

Fuel 225 Fuses 329 Head restraints

Additives 344 Fuse chart 288, 329 Adjusting height 33
Fuel requirements 344 Fuse extractor 288, 329 Adjusting tilt 34
Fuel reserve warning lamp 21, 255 Main fuse box 329 Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed
Gasoline additives 344 Spare fuses 288, 329 switch-off, exterior lamps
Premium unleaded gasoline 225, Headlamps
G
342, 344 Automatic mode 103
Garage door opener 25, 208
Fuel consumption statistics Headlamp cleaning system 146, 233
Gasoline see Fuel
After start 132 Manual mode 103
Gear range
Since reset 132 Refilling washer fluid 233
Automatic transmission 139
Fuel filler flap 225 Head-thorax airbag 65, 353
Indicator 21
Locking 225 Heated steering wheel* 197
Limiting 139
Opening 225 Height adjustments
Shifting into optimal 138
Unlocking 225 Head restraints 33
Glove box 19, 190
Fuel requirements 344 Seats 33
Closing 190
Fuel reserve tank Steering column 35
Opening 190
Message in display 286 Vehicle level 184
GPS 353
Fuel tank High beam flasher 105
Filler flap 225 H High beam headlamp indicator 21
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - Hands-free microphone 25 High beam headlamps 43, 102, 296
capacities 342 Hardtop open/close control 24 Replacing bulbs 298
Functions (control system) 111 Hardtop see Retractable hardtop Switching on 104
Fuse chart 288, 329 Hardtop switch 160 Hood 227
Hazard warning flasher 105 Messages in display 279
Hazard warning flasher switch 23 Horn 19
Hydroplaning 219

363
Index

I K KEYLESS-GO* card 84
Ignition 29, 31 Key Changing the batteries 294
Switching on 29 Opening retractable hardtop 163 Checking the batteries 87
Immobilizer 75 Key dependent memory 130 Checking vehicle lock status 87
Activating 48, 75 Key positions 29 Factory setting 86
Deactivating 75 Key, electronic Global locking 86
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and Battery check lamp 81 Global unlocking 86
warning Changing the batteries 293 Locking 88
Infant and child restraint systems 62 Checking the batteries 82 Loss of 89
Instrument cluster 20, 108, 353 Closing retractable hardtop 164 Messages in display 269
Select language 123 Factory setting 81 Reprogramming 86
Instrument lighting 108 Global locking 81 Unlocking 30, 84
Interior lighting 106 Global unlocking 81 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 23, 30,
Automatic control 106 Individual setting 81 40
Delayed switch-off 127 Messages in display 286 Keys 80
Manual operation 107 Positions in starter switch 29 Loss of 84
Interior lighting control 25 Remote controls 80 Kickdown 142, 353
Interior storage spaces 190 Reprogramming 81 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 123
Locking storage compartments 194 Starting the engine 40 Kneebag 57
Unlocking storage Turning off the engine 48
compartments 194, 291 Unlocking 28
Intermittent wiping 44 Key, Mechanical 290
KEYLESS-GO* 353
J
Key positions 30
Jack 289
Starting the engine 40
Turning off the engine 49

364
 Index

L Service indicator 241 Low beam headlamps 102, 296

Labels, identification 334 SRS 52 Replacing bulbs 298
Lamp bulbs, exterior 295 Turn signals 21 Lowering
Lamps, exterior Language Easy-Pack manually 292
Delayed switch-off 125 Multifunction display 123 Roll bar 62
Exterior lamp switch 19, 43 License plate lamps 124, 296 Luggage compartment, rear 195
Front 296 Replacing bulbs 300 Luggage cover 160
Headlamps 245 Light sensor 279 Message in display 272
Light sensor 279 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Opening/closing 160
Messages in display 274 Lighting Lumbar support adjustment 93
Replacing bulbs for rear 296, 299 Instruments 108
M
Switching off 102 Interior 106
Main fuse box 329
Switching on 102 Settings (control system) 124
Maintenance 241
Lamps, indicator and warning Trunk 107
Malfunction memory 118
ABS 21, 69, 70, 251 Lock buttons 28, 30
Calling up 118
ABS/ESP 250 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 50
Clearing 119
Airbag Off 57 Trunk (KEYLESS-GO*) 88
MANUAL
Brakes 253 Locking 47
Shift program mode
CHECK ENGINE 256 Automatic while driving 91
(SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 142
Coolant 254 Centrally from inside 92
Distronic* 173 Fuel filler flap 225
DTR* 173 Global (electronic key) 81
Engine diagnostics 256 Global (KEYLESS-GO* card) 86
Fuel reserve 255 Storage compartments 194
SBC 72 Trunk separately 83
Seat belts 256 Vehicle in an emergency 292

365
Index

Manual operations Mirrors 35 Display 287

Interior lighting control 107 Adjusting inside rear view mirror 35 Distronic* 262
Locking the vehicle 292 Automatic antiglare for inside Doors 286
Lowering Easy-Pack 292 mirror 145 Easy-entry/exit feature 271
Unlocking interior storage Exterior rear view mirror parking Engine oil level 280
compartments 291 position 131 ESP 261
Unlocking the driver’s door 290 Exterior rear view mirrors 35 Fuel reserve tank 286
Unlocking the trunk 291 Storing exterior mirror parking Hood 279
Massage function 94 position 100 Key 286
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 151 Misfiring 45 KEYLESS-GO* card 269
Memory function 353 MON 225, 353 Lamps 274
Storing exterior rear view mirror Mph or km/h in speedometer 123 Luggage cover 272
parking position 100 Multicontour backrest* 93 Parking brake 271
Storing key dependent settings 130 Multifunction display 110, 354 Retractable hardtop 287
Menus 111, 353 Left display field 21 Roll bar 286
AUDIO 115 Right display field 21 SBC brake system 265, 266, 268
Distronic* 117 Selecting language 123 Seat belts 272
Malfunction memory 118 Standard display 110 Tele Aid 263
NAVI 117 Multifunction display messages Telephone* 270
Standard display 115 ABC 258 Tires 281
TEL* 133 ABS 259 Trunk lid 272
Trip computer 131 BAS 260 Washer fluid 287
Microphone Battery 263, 264 Multifunction steering wheel 22, 111,
Hands-free microphone 25 Brake pads 265 354
Miles/kilometers in speedometer 123 Coolant 273 Buttons 111
Minimum distance 187 Coolant level 272, 274

366
 Index

N Side windows 158 Parking assistance (Parktronic*) 186

Navigation system Storage space in the armrest 193 Parking brake
Operating 117 Storage space in the center Engaging 47
Night security illumination 125 console 193 Message in display 271
Sunshade* 167 Releasing 41
O
Trunk from inside vehicle 89 Parking brake pedal 19
Octane number 355
Trunk lid 83 Parking lamps 296
Odometer, main 21
Operating Replacing the bulbs 299
Oil
CD player 116 Switching on 102
Adding 229
Navigation system 117 Parking position
Checking level 228
Radio 116 Exterior rear view mirrors 100, 131
Consumption 228
Telephone* 133 Parktronic* 24, 186, 354
Dipstick 228
Operator’s Manual 8 Activating 189
Filler neck 229
Overhead control panel 25 Cleaning sensors 246
Oil level
Overspeed range 109, 354 Deactivating 189
Checking 226
Malfunctioning 189
One-touch shifting 138 P
Minimum distance 187
Opening Panic alarm 67
Range 187
Ashtray 196 Panic button on SmartKey 67
Rear sensors 187
Cup holders 190 Panorama roof*
Sensors 246
Doors from the inside 89 Sunshade* 166
Warning indicators 19, 187
Fuel filler flap 225 Sunshade* closing 167
Passenger side
Glove box 190 Sunshade* opening 167
Front airbag 57
Hood 227 Parcel net in passenger footwell 194
Head-thorax airbag 58
Luggage cover 160 Parcel net in trunk 195
Parcel net in footwell 194
Retractable hardtop (key) 163 Parctronic* deactivation switch 24
Pedals 215
Retractable hardtop (switch) 160 Parking 218

367
Index

Phone book* 135 R Fuses 329

Loading 135 Radio High beam bulbs 298
Quick search 135 Select station 116 License plate lamp bulbs 300
Phone number* Station search 116 Low beam bulbs 298
Dialing 135 Station selection setting 128 Rear fog lamp bulb 299
Redialing 136 Radio transmitters, control and Rear lamp bulbs 296, 299
Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 288 operation 222 Rear turn signal bulbs 299
Poly-V-belt drive 354 Range (distance to empty) Wiper blades 301
Layout 335 Calling up 133 Reset knob 21
Power assistance 216 Reading lamp 25 Resetting
Power train 354 Rear lamps see Tail lamps All functions (control system) 120
Power windows 157 Rear luggage compartment 195 Fuel consumption statistics 132
Side windows 157 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Service indicator (FSS) 242
Problems while driving 45 Rear window defroster 146, 153 Trip odometer 109
Product information 7 Redial memory 136 Residual heat utilization 154
Program mode selector switch 354 Regular checks 226 Restraint systems 52
Automatic transmission 24, 141 Regular driving style 183 Airbags 52
PULSE function (Massage function) 94 Remote controls Child seat recognition 52
Electronic key 80 Child seats 52
Q
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 354 Emergency tensioning device
Quick search
Replacing (ETD) 52, 60
Phone book* 135
Backup lamp bulbs 299 Seat belt force limiter 60
Brake lamp bulbs 296 Seat belts 52, 58
Bulbs 295
Front lamp bulbs 298
Front turn signal bulbs 298

368
 Index

Retractable hardtop 354 Seat belt force limiter 60 Service

Closing (electronic key) 164 Seat belts 37, 52, 58 Batteries 319
Closing (switch) 161 Message in display 272 Calling up the service indicator 242
Locking after raising/lowering 162 Warning lamp 256 Major service (Service B) 241
Message in display 287 Seat cushion depth 33 Minor service (Service A) 241
Opening (key) 163 Seat heater Overdue 241
Opening (switch) 160 Switching off 97 Types 241
Problems when operating 164 Switching on 97 When due 241
Roll bar 61, 354 Seat ventilation* Service indicator 241
Installing wind screen 165 Switching off 96 Clearing 241
Lowering 62 Switching on 96 Service life (tires) 235
Message in display 286 Seats Service System see FSS 241
Raising 62 Adjusting backrest tilt 33 Setting
Warning lamp 21 Adjusting cushion depth 33 Convenience functions 129
Roll bar buttons 24 Adjusting height 33 Cruise control 170
RON 225, 355 Adjusting lumbar support 94 Daytime running lamp mode 124
Roof see Retractable hardtop Adjusting shoulder support 94 Distronic* time interval 179
Heater 97 Exterior rear view mirror parking
S
Massage function 94 position 131
SBC brake system 68, 72, 355
Moving 95 Individual vehicle 119
Activation 73
Selector lever 24 Instrument lighting 108
Deactivation 74
Lock 39, 355 Interior lighting delayed
Driving hints 74
Position (automatic switch-off 127
Messages in display 265, 266, 268
transmission) 137 Key dependent memory 130
Self-check 74
Lamps and lighting (control
Warning lamp 72
system) 124
Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit) 288

369
Index

Locator lighting 125 Settings SL 500

Miles/kilometers in Calling up Distronic* 117, 174 Spare wheel 338
speedometer 123 Convenience functions 129 Tires 338
Multifunction display language 123 Factory (electronic key) 81 SL 55 AMG Kompressor
Night security illumination 125 Individual (electronic key) 81 Tires 338
Radio station 116 Resetting all (control system) 120 SL 55 AMG Kompressor
Speedometer display mode 123 Settings menu MANUAL shift program mode 142
Station selection mode 128 Individual vehicle settings 119 Steering wheel gearshift control 143
Suspension tuning 183 Submenus 120 Snow chains 240
Temperature (interior) 149 Shifting Spare fuses 288, 329
Temperature indicator 122 into optimal gear range 138 Spare tire see Spare wheel 302
Time display mode 122 Shifting gears Spare wheel* 289, 312
Tire inflation pressure 129 On steering wheel (SL 55 AMG) 142 Inflating tire 316
Units Shoulder support Tire inflation pressure 316
Speedometer 123 Seat adjustment 94 Speed settings
Temperature 122 Side air vents 23 Cruise control 170
Tire inflation pressure 129 Side marker lamps 296, 299 Distronic* 177
Vehicle level control 184 Side windows 157 Speedometer 21
Setting speed Automatic opening 158 Setting units 123
Cruise control 169, 170 Closing 158 Sporty driving style 183
Distronic* 176, 177 Closing (KEYLESS-GO*) 88 SRS 355
Opening 158 Indicator lamp 252
Opening fully 158 Standing lamps 102, 296
Stopping 158 Replacing bulbs 299
Synchronizing power windows 158 Standing water
Driving instructions 222

370
 Index

Starter battery 232, 319 Locking 194 Switching off

Starter switch 19, 29 Locking compartments ABC 24
Starting difficulties 41 separately 194 Switching on
Starting position 29 Rear 193 ABC 24
Starting the engine Storage tray 193 Front fog lamps 104
With KEYLESS-GO* 40 Unlocking 194 Rear fog lamp 104
With the key 40 Unlocking compartments Switching on headlamps 43
Steering column separately 194 Symbol
Height adjustment 35 Ventilated compartments 156 Distance warning function* 117, 174
Length adjustment 34 Submenus 114 Synchronizing
Steering wheel 34 Convenience 129 Power windows 158
Adjusting 34 Instrument cluster 122
T
Buttons 22 Lighting 124
Tachometer 21, 109
Heating* 197 Selecting 120
Displaying gear range 139
Height adjustment 35 Settings menus 120
Tail lamps 296, 299
Shifting gears (SL 55 AMG) 142 Vehicle 127
Technical data 332
Steering wheel adjustment stalk 19 Sun blind see Sunshade
Electrical system 339
Steering wheel gearshift control Sun visors 146
Main dimensions 340
Activating 143 Sunshade* 166
Rims and tires 337
Deactivating 143 Closing 167
Weights 341
Storage spaces Opening 167
Windshield and headlamp washer
Armrest 193 Suspension tuning
system 347
Cup holder 190 For regular driving style 183
Glove box 190 For sporty driving style 183
In door 192 Setting 183
In rear 193

371
Index

Tele Aid 200 Temperature Tires 234, 348

Emergency calls 202 Outside temperature indicator 109 Direction of rotation 235
Information 205 Sensor 25 Driving instructions 219
Initiating an emergency call Setting interior temperature 149 Messages in display 281
manually 203 Setting units in display 122 Retreads 234
Messages in display 263 Tires 236 Rims and tires 337
Roadside assistance 204 Tightening torque 318, 355 Rotating 238
SOS button 25, 203 Tilt Service life 235
Tele Aid system 201 Head restraint 34 SL 500 338
Tele Aid System 355 Time display mode SL 55 AMG Kompressor 338
Telephone* 22, 199 Setting 122 Temperature 236, 349
Answering a call 134 Tire inflation pressure 305, 310 Tread depth 239
Dialing 135 Checking 226, 235 Wear pattern 238
Ending a call 135 Setting units 129 Winter 239
Hands-free microphone 25 Tire speed rating 220, 355 Tools 288
Loading phone book* 135 Tire traction 220 Tow-away alarm 24, 77
Messages in display 270 TIREFIT 355 Arming 77
Operating 133 TIREFIT kit 289, 302, 308 Disarming 77
Redialing 136 TIREFIT kit 1 Disarming for transport 77
Signal strength 134 Instructions for use 302 Tow-away alarm switch 24
Telephones and two-way radios 223 TIREFIT kit 2 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 288
Instructions for use 308 Installing 327
Towing the vehicle 325
Traction 141, 355
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Fluid level 230

372
 Index

Trip computer 131 U Minimum distance (Parktronic*) 187

Trip odometer 21 Units Towing 325
Resetting 109 Setting speedometer units 123 Unlocking 23
Trunk Setting temperature units 122 Unlocking in an emergency 290
Closing the lid 91 Setting tire inflation pressure Vehicle level 184, 356
Easy-Pack load assist 198 units 129 Changing 185
Lighting 107 Unlocking 28 Setting 185
Lock button (KEYLESS-GO*) 88 Centrally from inside 92 Automatic 185
Locking separately 83 Driver’s door in an emergency 290 Manual 185
Message in display 272 Fuel filler flap 225 Vehicle level control 356
Opening from inside vehicle 89 Global (KEYLESS-GO* card) 86 Vehicle level control switch 24
Opening the lid 83 Interior storage compartments 291 Vehicle lighting
Parcel net 195 Storage compartments 194 Checking 226
Trunk lid lock 291 Trunk 82, 89 Vehicle lock status
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO*) 88 Trunk (KEYLESS-GO*) 88 Checking (KEYLESS-GO*) 87
Unlocking in an emergency 291 Trunk in an emergency 291 Vehicle tool kit 288
Unlocking separately 82 Vehicle in an emergency 290 Alignment bolt 288
Trunk lid 82 With the electronic key 28 Fuse chart 288
Trunk lid emergency release 90 With the KEYLESS-GO* card 30, 84 Fuse extractor 288
Trunk lighting 107 Uphill driving Hex-socket wrench 288
Turn signals 19, 43 Cruise control 169 Open-end wrench 288
Additional in mirrors 296 Screwdriver 288
V
Front bulbs 296 Spare fuses 288
Vehicle
Indicator lamps 21 Universal pliers 288
Individual settings 119
Rear bulbs 296 Wheel wrench 288
Locking 23
Ventilation and residual heat 154
Locking in an emergency 292

373
Index

VIN (vehicle identification number) 334, Windshield washer fluid 45

356 Filler neck 233
Voice control system* 19 Message in display 287
Hands-free microphone 25 Mixing ratio 347
Voice control system+ 353 Refilling 233
Windshield wipers 19, 44
W
Fast wiper speed 44
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Intermittent wiping 44
warning
Replacing wiper blades 301
Warning sounds
Wiping with windshield washer
Distance warning function* 179
fluid 45
Distronic* 173
Winter driving
Warranty coverage 333
Snow chains 240
Washing the vehicle 245
Tires 239
Wear pattern (tires) 238
Transmission program mode 141
Wheel change 312
Winter driving instructions 221
Tightening torque 318
Winter tires 239
Wind screen 165, 356
Wrench, hex-socket (vehicle tool
Installing 165
kit) 288, 292
Removing 166
Wrench, open-end (vehicle tool kit) 288
Windows see Side windows
Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 288, 289
Windshield
Refilling washer fluid 233 X
Washer fluid 45, 233 Xenon headlamps 356
Washer system 233 Bi-Xenon 351
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 347

374
 Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.00-2865-26
Press time 10/07/02
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany